You are on page 1of 226

GE Power

Waukesha* gas engines

VHP Packaging Guide


*
with ESM1 and AFR2
General packaging guidelines to help meet the best recommended practices for the application and
use of Waukesha VHP L5794GSI, L7042GSI S4, L7044GSI, and P9394GSI engines with ESM1 and AFR2.

form 10026-4

* Indicates a trademark of the General Electric Company


Disclaimer
GE’s Waukesha gas engines (“Waukesha”) is providing the following packaging guidelines to help you meet best recommended
practices for the application and use of Waukesha engines. Waukesha strongly recommends that engines not be started or operated
until all packaging guidelines are met. Operating engines in applications that do not meet packaging guidelines has the potential to
cause engine damage and/or personal injury. Waukesha will not be held liable or take any responsibility for any damage or incidents
that occur due to operation of an engine that does not meet the packaging guidelines.
Table of Contents Chapter I

CONTENTS
Chapter 1 - Safety
Chapter 2 - General Information
Chapter 3 - Technical Data
Chapter 4 - Engine Base Design
Chapter 5 - Torsional Analysis
Chapter 6 - Installation
Chapter 7 - Mounting and Alignment
Chapter 8 - Engine Lifting
Chapter 9 - Cooling System
Chapter 10 - Lubrication System
Chapter 11 - Crankcase Breather System
Chapter 12 - Crankcase Pressure Relief Valves
Chapter 13 - Combustion Air Intake System
Chapter 14 - Exhaust System
Chapter 15 - emPact Emission Control System
Chapter 16 - Fuel System
Chapter 17 - Starting System
Chapter 18 - ESM Packaging
Chapter 19 - Asset Performance Management
Chapter 20 - Engine Operation
Chapter 21 - Engine Commissioning
Chapter 22 - Storage
Chapter 23 - Maintenance Considerations
Appendices

I - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter I Table of Contents

I - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1

CHAPTER 1 - SAFETY
SAFETY INTRODUCTION
The following safety precautions are published for your information. Waukesha does not, by
the publication of these precautions, imply or in any way represent that they are the sum of
all dangers present near industrial engines or fuel rating test units. If you are installing, oper-
ating, or servicing a Waukesha product, it is your responsibility to ensure full compliance with
all applicable safety codes and requirements. All requirements of the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act must be met when Waukesha products are operated in areas that are
under the jurisdiction of the United States of America. Waukesha products operated in other
countries must be installed, operated and serviced in compliance with any and all applicable
safety requirements of that country.

For details on safety rules and regulations in the United States, contact your local office of the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

The words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE are used throughout this manual to
highlight important information. Be certain that the meanings of these alerts are known to all
who work on or near the equipment.

Follow the safety information throughout this manual in addition to the safety policies and
procedures of your employer.

This safety alert symbol appears with most safety statements. It means atten-
tion, become alert, your safety is involved! Please read and abide by the mes-
sage that follows the safety alert symbol.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could


result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a situation which can cause damage to the engine,


personal property and/or the environment, or cause the
equipment to operate improperly.

NOTE: Indicates a procedure, practice or condition that should be followed in order for the en-
gine or component to function in the manner intended.

1 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety

Symbol Description
A black graphical symbol inside a yellow triangle with a black triangular band defines
a safety sign that indicates a hazard.

A black graphical symbol inside a red circular band with a red diagonal bar defines a
safety sign that indicates that an action shall not be taken or shall be stopped.

A white graphical symbol inside a blue circle defines a safety sign that indicates that
an action that shall be taken to avoid a hazard.

Warnings
Safety Alert Symbol

Asphyxiation Hazard

Burn Hazard

Burn Hazard (Chemical)

Burn Hazard (Hot Liquid)

Burn Hazard (Steam)

Burst/Pressure Hazard

Crush Hazard (Hand)

1 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1
Crush Hazard (Side)

Crush Hazard (Side Pinned)

Crush Hazard (Top)

Electrical Shock Hazard

Entanglement Hazard

Explosion Hazard

Fire Hazard

Flying Object Hazard

Hazardous Chemicals

High-Pressure Hazard

Impact Hazard

Pinch-Point Hazard

1 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety
Pressure Hazard

Puncture Hazard

Sever Hazard

Sever Hazard (Rotating Blade)

Prohibitions
Do not operate with guards removed

Do not leave tools in the area

Drugs and Alcohol Prohibited

Lifting/Transporting only by qualified personnel

Welding only by qualified personnel

1 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1
Mandatory Actions
Read Manufacturer’s Instructions

Wear Eye Protection

Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Wear Protective Gloves

Miscellaneous
Emergency Stop

Grounding Point

Physical Earth

Use Emergency Stop (E-Stop); Stop Engine

The safety messages that follow have WARNING level hazards.

1 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety
SAFETY LABELS
All safety labels must be legible to alert personnel of safety hazards. Replace any illeg-
ible or missing labels immediately. Safety labels removed during any repair work must
be replaced in their original position before the engine is placed back into service.

EQUIPMENT REPAIR AND SERVICE


Always stop the engine before cleaning, servicing or repairing the engine
or any driven equipment.
• If possible, lock all controls in the OFF position and remove the key.
• Put a sign on the control panel warning that the engine is being serviced.
• Close all manual control valves.
• Disconnect and lock out all energy sources to the engine, including all fuel, electric,
hydraulic and pneumatic connections.
• Disconnect or lock out driven equipment to prevent the possibility of the driven
equipment rotating the disabled engine.

Allow the engine to cool to room temperature before cleaning, servicing or repairing
the engine. Some engine components and fluids are extremely hot even after the en-
gine has been shut down. Allow sufficient time for all engine components and fluids to
cool to room temperature before attempting any service procedure.

Exercise extreme care when moving the engine or its components. Never walk or
stand directly under an engine or component while it is suspended. Always consider
the weight of the engine or the components involved when selecting hoisting chains
and lifting equipment. Be positive about the rated capacity of lifting equipment. Use
only properly maintained lifting equipment with a lifting capacity that exceeds the
known weight of the object to be lifted.

ACID
Always read and comply with the acid manufacturer’s recommendations for proper
use and handling of acids.

BATTERIES
Always read and comply with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations for pro-
cedures concerning proper battery use and maintenance..

Batteries contain sulfuric acid and generate explosive mixtures of hydrogen and oxy-
gen gases. Keep any device that may cause sparks or flames away from the battery
to prevent explosion.

1 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1
Always wear protective glasses or goggles and protective clothing when working with
batteries. You must follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions on safety, mainte-
nance and installation procedures.

BODY PROTECTION
Always wear OSHA-approved body, sight, hearing and respiratory system protection.
Never wear loose clothing, jewelry or long hair around an engine.

CHEMICALS
GENERAL

Always read and comply with the safety labels on all containers. Do not remove or
deface the container labels.

CLEANING SOLVENTS

Always read and comply with the solvent manufacturer’s recommendations for prop-
er use and handling of solvents. Do not use gasoline, paint thinners or other highly
volatile fluids for cleaning.

LIQUID NITROGEN

Always read and comply with the liquid nitrogen manufacturer’s recommendations
for proper use and handling of liquid nitrogen.

COMPONENTS
HEATED OR FROZEN

Always wear protective equipment when installing or removing heated or frozen com-
ponents. Some components are heated or cooled to extreme temperatures for proper
installation or removal.

INTERFERENCE FIT

Always wear protective equipment when installing or removing components with an


interference fit. Installation or removal of interference components may cause flying
debris.

1 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety
COOLING SYSTEM
Always wear protective equipment when venting, flushing or blowing down
the cooling system. Operational coolant temperatures can range from
180° – 250°F (82° – 121°C).

Do not service the cooling system while the engine is operating or when the
coolant or vapor is hot. Operational coolant temperatures can range from
180° – 250°F (82° – 121°C).

ELECTRICAL
GENERAL

Equipment must be grounded by qualified personnel in accordance with IEC (Interna-


tional Electric Code) and local electrical codes.

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any electrical components unless you are
a technically qualified individual who is familiar with the electrical elements involved.

Disconnect all electrical power supplies before making any connections or servicing
any part of the electrical system.

Always label “high voltage” on engine-mounted equipment over 24 volts nominal.

IGNITION

Avoid contact with ignition units and wiring. Ignition system components can store
electrical energy, and if contacted, can cause electrical shock.

Properly discharge any electrical component that has the capability to store electrical
energy before connecting or servicing that component.

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
An Emergency Shutdown must never be used for a normal engine shutdown. Doing so
may result in unburned fuel in the exhaust manifold. Failure to comply increases the
risk of an exhaust explosion.

1 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1
EXHAUST
Do not inhale engine exhaust gases. Ensure that exhaust systems are leak-free and
that all exhaust gases are properly vented to the outside of the building.

Do not touch or service any heated exhaust components. Allow sufficient time for
exhaust components to cool to room temperature before attempting any service pro-
cedure.

FIRE PROTECTION
See local and federal fire regulations for guidelines for proper site fire protection.

FUELS
GENERAL

Ensure that there are no leaks in the fuel supply. Engine fuels are highly combustible
and can ignite or explode.

GASEOUS

Do not inhale gaseous fuels. Some components of fuel gas are odorless, tasteless and
highly toxic.

Shut off the fuel supply if a gaseous engine has been cranked excessively without
starting. Crank the engine to purge the cylinders and exhaust system of accumulated
unburned fuel. Failure to purge accumulated unburned fuel in the engine and exhaust
system can result in an explosion.

LIQUIDS

Use protective equipment when working with liquids and related components. Liquids
can be absorbed into the body.

1 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety
INTOXICANTS AND NARCOTICS
Do not allow anyone under the influence of intoxicants and/or narcotics to work on or
around industrial engines. Workers under the influence of intoxicants and/or narcotics
are a hazard to both themselves and other employees.

PRESSURIZED FLUIDS /GAS/AIR


Never use pressurized fluids/gas/air to clean clothing or body parts. Never use body
parts to check for leaks or flow rates. Observe all applicable local and federal regula-
tions relating to pressurized fluids/gas/air.

PROTECTIVE GUARDS
Provide guarding to protect persons or structures from rotating or heated parts. It
is the responsibility of the engine owner to specify and provide guarding. See OSHA
standards on “machine guarding” for details on safety rules and regulations concern-
ing guarding techniques.

SPRINGS
Use appropriate equipment and protective gear when servicing or using products that
contain springs. Springs, under tension or compression, can eject if improper equip-
ment or procedures are used.

TOOLS
ELECTRICAL

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any electrical tools unless you are a techni-
cally qualified individual who is familiar with them.

HYDRAULIC

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any hydraulic tools unless you are a techni-
cally qualified individual who is familiar with them. Hydraulic tools use extremely high
hydraulic pressure.

Always follow recommended procedures when using hydraulic tensioning devices.

1 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Safety Chapter 1
PNEUMATIC

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any pneumatic tools unless you are a tech-
nically qualified individual who is familiar with them. Pneumatic tools use pressurized
air.

WEIGHT
Always consider the weight of the item being lifted and use only properly rated lifting
equipment and approved lifting methods.

Never walk or stand under an engine or component while it is suspended.

WELDING
Comply with the welder manufacturer’s recommendations for procedures concerning
proper use of the welder.

The safety message that follows has a CAUTION level


hazard.

Ensure that all tools and other objects are removed from the unit and any driven
equipment before restarting the unit.

The safety messages that follow have NOTICE level hazards.

Ensure that the welder is properly grounded before attempting to weld on or near an
engine.

Table 1-1: Disconnect the ignition harness and electronically controlled devices before welding
with an electric arc welder on or near an engine. Failure to disconnect the harnesses and electron-
ically controlled devices could result in severe engine damage.

1 - 11 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 1 Safety

1 - 12 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
General Information Chapter 2

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION


The L5794GSI, L7042GSI S4, and L7044GSI VHP Series Four engines are 4-cycle, 12-cylinder
vee-configured engines. The P9394GSI is a 4-cycle, 16-cylinder vee-configured engine. All
engines rotate in the standard counterclockwise direction, as viewed from the rear (flywheel)
end. “GSI” engines are rich combustion (stoichiometric) engines equipped with turbochargers
that “force” high-velocity ambient air through the intercoolers, carburetors, and intake man-
ifolds before entering the combustion chamber.

SCOPE OF SUPPLY
A scope of supply list for the engines are available in the Appendix.

BASIC ENGINE DESCRIPTION

AFR2
Waukesha’s next generation air/fuel ratio controller for rich-burn engines. Control is based
on pre-catalyst O2 setpoints. System includes fuel control valves (instead of steppers), an en-
hanced O2 sensor optimized for gaseous fuels, and Human/Machine Interface (HMI) display
panel. The display panel provides on-screen AFR2 setup instructions, real-time engine oper-
ating parameters without a laptop, and buttons to adjust the system richer or leaner.

EMPACT EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (emPACT)


Waukesha’s complete emission solution for rich-burn engines capable of achieving 0.5 g/
bhp-hr NOx/1.0 g/ bhp-hr CO or 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx / 0.30 g/bhp-hr CO. Includes engine, 3-way
catalyst, and enhanced air/fuel ratio controller. Control is based on post-catalyst O2, allowing
system to automatically adjust air/fuel ratio based on feedback from emissions coming out
of catalyst, simplifying compliance across range of speeds, loads, and other operating condi-
tions. System includes fuel control valves (instead of steppers), enhanced pre- and post-cata-
lyst O2 sensors optimized for gaseous fuels, pre- and post-catalyst temperature and pressure
sensors, and Human/Machine Interface (HMI) display panel. The display panel provides on-
screen emPact setup instructions, real-time engine operating parameters without a laptop,
and buttons to adjust the system richer or leaner.

CRANKCASE
The crankcase is a gray iron casting. For assembled rigidity, the main bearing caps are at-
tached to the crankcase with both vertical studs and lateral tie bolts. This feature makes the
crankcase assembly more rigid and lengthens the life of the main bearings.

For ease of operation and overall serviceability, the sides of the engine are clear of compo-
nents and piping. The crankshaft covers can be easily removed.

The oil level in the sump is below the crankshaft covers, so the covers can be quickly removed
and the crankshaft inspected or the bearing caps positioned without draining oil.

Optional crankcase pressure relief valves are mounted on the side of the crankcase.

2 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 2 General Information
CRANKCASE BREATHER SYSTEM
The breather system is a closed self-regulating breather system which is piped to the en-
gine air intake system to maintain a slight negative pressure in the crankcase. The negative
pressure rids the crankcase of harmful water vapors and combustion gases, and helps to
prevent sludge buildup and oil contamination. Maintaining a negative crankcase pressure
is important to prevent oil leaks and vacate harmful vapors, but too much vacuum pulls in
environmental dust and dirt. Vacuum lines from both turbocharger compressors create the
draw past engine seals that pulls the gases from the crankcase. The gases go through a
pre-separator and main (coalescing) separator to remove oil vapor from the gases prior to
being drawn into the engine. The separated oil is returned to the crankcase through a return
tube which contains a one-way check valve that prevents backflow of oil and/or vapor back
into the separator. The crankcase pressure is regulated by the pressure regulator valve so the
specified negative pressure in the crankcase is maintained.

CRANKSHAFT
The underslung crankshaft is made of a low alloy, high tensile strength forged steel. The
crankshaft is counterweighted to achieve a near perfect balance of rotating forces.

A viscous vibration damper is installed on the forward end of the crankshaft along with a gear
that drives the front end gear train and accessories. The flywheel, with ring gear, is installed
on the rear end of the crankshaft and is machined to accept several options.

CONNECTING RODS
The connecting rods are machined to ensure maximum strength, precise balance and con-
sistent weight between cylinders. They are made of a low alloy, high tensile strength forged
steel, and are rifle-drilled to supply pressurized lube oil from the crankshaft to the piston pin
bushings. The split line of the rod and cap allows for removal of the connecting rod assembly
up through the cylinder sleeve bore.

The serrated split line ensures precise alignment and transfer of loads. The caps and rods are
match-numbered to ensure that each cap is mated with the correct blade during reassembly.

The connecting rod cap fasteners, like all critical fasteners used on the engine, are torqued
to specific values.

PISTONS
The pistons are machined from one-piece castings. The dimension of the piston skirt at room
temperature is slightly larger at a point 90° to the piston pin bore. This feature allows the pis-
ton to expand from a shape that is somewhat oval to one that is almost perfectly round when
operating at stabilized engine temperatures.

CYLINDER SLEEVES
Each wet-type cylinder sleeve has a flange at its upper end to locate it in the crankcase upper
deck. The sleeves have three external ring grooves to hold the lower crankcase bore seals.

CAMSHAFT
The design of the camshaft lobe and camshaft minimizes valve overlap and reduces the
flow of gases between the intake and exhaust ports. This improves fuel efficiency and lowers
exhaust emissions.

2 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
General Information Chapter 2
CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVES
The cylinder heads used on Series Four VHP engines has four valves, two intake and two
exhaust. The cylinder heads offer several features including improved cooling, superior valve
life, increased overhaul interval, and rigid valve bridge assembly.

TURBOCHARGER
The 12-cylinder and 16-cylinder engines have two turbochargers, one for each cylinder bank.
The turbocharger is wastegate-controlled and uses a watercooled center section. The center
section consists of a main shaft that connects the intake compressor and exhaust turbine
wheels. The intake compressor is mated to the intake manifold, and the exhaust turbine is
mated to the exhaust manifold. With the engine running, hot exhaust gases are forced into
the exhaust turbine wheel, causing it to rotate at high speed. This causes the intake com-
pressor wheel to rotate at the same speed because of the main shaft connection. The high-
speed rotation of the intake compressor wheel creates compressed air that is forced into the
carburetor.

INTERCOOLER
The intercoolers cool the inlet air after the turbochargers to provide denser air to the engine
combustion chambers.

CARBURETOR
One carburetor is mounted on each bank just below the center of each intake manifold. The
carburetor produces a combustible mixture by automatically mixing fuel from the FCV and
air from the turbocharger.

INTAKE MANIFOLD
The air/fuel mixture passes through the intake manifolds on each side of the engine, one for
each bank, where it is distributed to the individual cylinders.

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Each water-cooled exhaust manifold assembly is composed of six individual segments. One
exhaust manifold segment is joined to the next by a manifold pilot. The exhaust port of each
cylinder head is connected to one water-jacketed segment of the exhaust manifold. Exhaust
gas flows through the exhaust manifold to the turbocharger turbine. On the 16-cylinder en-
gine the center exhaust manifold spans two cylinder heads and supports the turbo.

WATER CIRCULATION SYSTEM


Auxiliary Circuit – The auxiliary circuit provides cooling to the intercooler, oil cooler, and turbo-
charger bearings. The system uses a 130° F (54° C) auxiliary water temperature control valve
and bypass, belt driven centrifugal type water pump, mounted intercooler, and mounted oil
cooler.

Engine Jacket – The jacket circuit provides cooling to the cylinder sleeves, cylinder heads, and
the exhaust manifolds. This system includes mounted 180°F (82°C) jacket water temperature
control valve with mounted bypass and gear driven centrifugal type water pump.

2 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 2 General Information
ESM
The ESM integrates spark timing control, speed governing, knock detection, start-stop con-
trol, air/fuel control, diagnostic tools, fault logging and engine safeties. ESM system automa-
tion and monitoring provides:

• Better engine performance

• Extensive system diagnostics

• Rapid troubleshooting of engines

• Local and remote monitoring capability used to trend engine performance.

• Easy integration into an extensive data acquisition system

ENGINE MONITORING DEVICES


The shipped loose HMI panel must be mounted in a customer supplied panel and wired to
ESM. The HMI provides the interface to the fuel system. It displays status, settings, alarms and
history.

Commands are performed using the keys on the HMI’s faceplate. The USB Port is used to
retrieve recorded data logs (in .CSV format for analysis purposes) as well as to update/re-pro-
gram the HMI.

The HMI interfaces with the ECM and ECU through CAN communication for displayed values,
faults and calibrations. The temperature rating for the HMI panel is -40° to 158°F (-40° to
70°C).

Wired sensors for exhaust O2, lube oil pressure and temperature, intake manifold tempera-
ture and pressure, overspeed; and jacket water temperature; all accessible through ESM.
Sensors meet Canadian Standards Association Class 1, Division 2, Group A, B, C, & D (Canada
& US) hazardous location requirements. ESM continually monitors combustion performance
through accelerometers to provide detonation protection. Dual magnetic pick-ups are used
for accurate engine speed monitoring.

ESM provides predictive spark plug diagnostics as well as advanced diagnostics of engine
and all ESM sensors and logs any faults into non-volatile flash memory. Optional K-type
thermocouples for individual cylinder exhaust temperatures, pre and post turbocharger and
main bearing temperatures are wired to a common bulkhead.

Waukesha preprogrammed HMI panel for engine and AFR2 control readout, which provides
direct interface for AFR2 setup and monitoring. All ESM and AFR2 information with alarm and
shutdown faults are displayed. All ESM and AFR2 parameters are available via a MODBUS
RS485 signal.

2 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Technical Data Chapter 3

CHAPTER 3 - TECHNICAL DATA


WHERE TO FIND TECHNICAL DATA
Technical data for Waukesha engines can be found on the website, ge-distributedpower.com.
Access to the website can be requested by completing the form found by clicking the “Reg-
ister” link on the top of the page. Permission must be granted to receive a username and
password, and once access is granted, you will be able to login.

Table 3-1: Technical Data Sheets Available on www.ge-distributedpower.com

L5794GSI L7042GSI S4 L7044GSI P9394GSI SHEET NAME


SPECIFICATIONS S-5584-3 S-5585-4 S-5585-3 S-5585-5 Engine Specification Sheet
RATINGS & C-268-10 C-278-14 C-278-13 C-984-13 Engine Rating and Fuel Con-
STANDARDS sumption
HEAT REJECTION S-6124-96 S-6124-98 S-6124-97 S-6124-92 Heat Rejection & Emissions
with AFR2
S-6124-89 S-6124-99 S-6124-88 S-6124-102 Heat Rejection & Emissions
with emPact Code 1004
S-6124-93 S-6124-94 S-6124-95 S-6124-103 Heat Rejection & Emissions
with emPact Code 1005
COOLING SYSTEM S-5136-34 S-5136-35 Jacket Water Pump Perfor-
mance
  S-6543-36 S-6535-17 Auxiliary Water Pump Per-
formance
  S-6699-7 Cooling System Guidelines
  S-7424-1 Inlet Pressure Requirement
for Jacket Water Pump
  S-7610-3 Water Treatment Guidelines
  S-8472-2 S-6564-52 Cooling System Schematic
S-8473-2 Elevated Ambient Air Tem-
perature and Altitude Cor-
rection to Heat Rejection
CONTROL S-8382-2 Alarm and Shutdown Set-
SYSTEM points
DRIVE DATA SA-2905-H Definitions for Varioous
Types of Duty
  S-4052-13 S-7232-437 Front End Drive Data
  S-6900-3 Flywheel Information
  S-8467-2 Maximum Unbalanced Iner-
tia Forces and Moments
SOUND DATA S-8205-9 Bare Exhaust Sound Data
S-8205-10 Engine Sound Data
EMISSIONS DATA S-8483-6 Gas Engine Emissions Levels
INTAKE & S-7567-3 Maximum Permissible Ex-
EXHAUST haust Backpressure
SYSTEMS
  S-8117-2 Engine Exhaust Recoverable
Energy Calculations
S-8242 Exhaust System Installation
Guide

3 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 3 Technical Data
POWER S-8154-101 Power Adjustments for Alti-
ADJUSTMENTS & tude and Ambient Air Tem-
WKI* perature
S7079-39 S7079-37 S7079-25 S7079-38 Power Adjustments for Fuel
Quality (WKI* Curve)
FUEL SYSTEM SA-434-D Engine Mechanical Efficiency
Calculation
  SA-6656-L Gas Solenoid Valve Selection
  S-5806A Gas Flow Data in Piping
  S-6656-23 Gas Pressure Limits to En-
gine Mounted Regulator
  S-7032-2 Procedure for Calculating
Fuel Gas SLHV
  S-7884-7 Gaseous Fuel Specification
  S-7898-2 Glossary of Gaseous Fuel
Terms
LUBRICATION S-1015-30 Lube Oil Recommendations
SYSTEM
  S-3549-J Allowable Engine Angle for
Operation
  S-7382-56 Prelube and Postlube Re-
quirements
STARTING S-7447-8 Air Volume and Pressure
SYSTEMS Guidelines for Air Starter

Table 3-2: Engine Specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Description L5794GSI L7042GSI S4 P9394GSI
L7044GSI
Type 4-cycle, rich-burn
Aspiration Turbocharged, intercooled
Number of Cylinders V-12, 4 valves per cylinder V-16, 4 valves
per cylinder
Bore x Stroke 8.50 x 8.50 in. (216 x 9.375 x 8.50 in. (238 x 216 mm)
216 mm)
Displacement 5788 cu. In. (95 L) 7040 cu. In. (115 L) 9388 cu. in. (153.9 L)
Compression Ratio 8.25:1 8:01 9.7:1
Mean Piston speed @ 1200 RPM 1700 ft/min (8.64 m/sec)
Speed Range 700 - 1,200 RPM 900-1,200 rpm
Low Idle 700 RPM
Maximum Sound Pressure Level 103 dB(A) 105 dB(A)
Firing Order 1R-6L-5R-2L-3R-4L-6R-1L-2R-5L-4R-3L 1R, 1L, 3R, 3L, 7R, 7L,
5R, 5L, 8R, 8L, 6R, 6L,
2R, 2L, 4R, 4L
OIL SYSTEM
Sump Capacity, Including Filter & 190 gal (719 L) 259 gal. (980 liters)
Cooler
Deep Sump Oil pan (Low level mark) 152 gal (575 L) 211 gal. (799 liters)
Deep Sump Oil pan (Full level mark) 173 gal (655 L) 239 gal. (905 liters)
Main Filter 26 micron @ 98.6% absolute efficiency

3 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Technical Data Chapter 3
Normal Oil Pressure 50 - 60 psi (345 - 414 kPa)
Low Oil Pressure Alarm Setpoint 35 psi (241 kPa)
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown Setpoint 30 psi (207 kPa)
PRE / POSTLUBE
Prelube Duration Recommend: 3 minutes before starting. 2 minutes before
Required Min: 30 sec. or until pressure is starting
obtained
Prelube Pressure in Header 1 - 4 psi (7 - 31 kPa) 13 psi (90 kPa)
Postlube Duration (after hot 5 minutes 10 minutes
shutdown) minimum1
Normal Oil Header Temperature 180°F (82°C)
Oil Header Temperature Alarm 195°F (91°C)
Setpoint
Oil Header Temperature Shutdown 205°F (96°C)
Setpoint
Prelube Inline Lubricator Lubricant SAE 10W oil at 32°F (0°C) and above.
Use No. 2 Diesel Oil below 32°F (0°C)
Pneumatic Prelube Motor, Inline 0.5 pint (0.2 liter)
Lubricator
CRANKCASE BREATHER SYSTEM
Crankcase Vacuum -3 (negative) to 0 inch H2O (-76 to 0 mm H2O)
COOLING SYSTEM
Normal Jacket Water Outlet 180° F (82° C)
Temperature
Normal Intercooler Inlet 130°F (54°C)
Temperature
Jacket Coolant Capacity, Engine 107 gal (405 L) 148 gallons (560 L)
Only
Auxiliary Circuit Capacity, Engine 12 gal (45 L) 16 gallon (60 L)
Only
FUEL SYSTEM
Natural Gas Pressure at Regulator 30 - 60 psi (207 - 414 kPa)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Maximum Permissible Back Pressure 18 in. (457 mm) H2O at 158 BMEP/1200 RPM 20 in. (508 mm) of
H2O
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Maximum Permissible Restriction 15 inch-H2O (381 mm-H2O)
Required Filtering Efficiency (Coarse 99.70%
Dust Per SAE J726 / ISO 5011, Latest
Version)
STARTING SYSTEM
Electric Starting - Oil heaters 24 volts DC
required if ambient temperature is
below 65° F (18.3° C)
Air Starting Pressure - Oil heaters 150 psi (1034 kPa) MAX
required if ambient temperature is
below 50° F (10° C)

3 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 3 Technical Data
MISCELLANEOUS
Recommended Minimum Spacing 36 in. (914 mm)
Between Engines
Recommended Minimum Distance 36 in. (914 mm)
to Wall
Recommended Minimum Overhead 60 in. (1,524 mm) See Note 2
Clearance
Engine Without Shipping Skid 25,090 lb (11,380 kg) 24,600 lb (11,158 kg) 33,887 lb. (15,371 kg)
Heaviest Engine Part, Top Overhaul, 235 lb. (107 kg)
Cylinder Head

1. Turbocharger life can be shortened if this prelube is shorter.


2. Sufficient height to permit use of a chain hoist for removal of heavier components.

ENGCALC
For engine data at site specific conditions and fuel, EngCalc is available to download off the
website ge-distributedpower.com. When downloaded, there will be 2 files which must be
saved in the same directory together and requires Microsoft Excel version 2003 or newer. This
program will provide site specific engine data based on a user’s input of site conditions and
a fuel analysis. The data provided by EngCalc must be used when sizing radiators, catalysts,
and other auxiliary components. Data from EngCalc can be printed out in a report format.

Figure 3-1: EngCalc Inputs Page

3 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Technical Data Chapter 3

OUTLINE DRAWINGS
Outline drawings are available on ge-distributedpower.com. The outline drawings are orga-
nized engine model, and will show dimensions, connection sizes, and component identifi-
cations. These outline drawings are just for the base engine with no option codes. If option
codes are ordered, and they change components from the base engine, there will be an op-
tion code outline drawing listed on the page by option code number. These option code out-
line drawings should be overlaid over the base engine drawing and the changes called out
on the option code drawing should be made. (e.g. Replaces engine connections 14 and 15 on
standard pricecode installation drawing.)

Outline drawings are also available for engines ordered as “Gas Compression Spec” which
have option codes installed as standard which are commonly used in gas compression appli-
cations. Refer to the Scope of Supply section for details of what is included on Gas Compres-
sion Spec engines.

Figure 3-2: L7044GSI Base Engine Outline Drawing (no options)

Figure 3-3: L7044GSI Option Code 9208 Outline Drawing

The outline drawings page also has wiring diagrams for the ESM system and HMI Installation.

3 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 3 Technical Data
SERVICE BULLETINS
Waukesha releases Service Bulletins to update the field on changes, retrofits or new offerings
that are applicable to existing engines. The Service Bulletin Index is available on the Wauke-
sha website www.ge-distributedpower.com. There is also a registry list for people who want
to receive an e-mail when a new Service Bulletin is released. To register for these notifications
please e-mail AppEngineering.Department@ge.com.

3D MODELS
There is a Support Central website set up that contains 3D models for the base engine. This
model is only of the base engine, and may not fully represent the engine that is ordered.
Separate access will need to be granted for these 3D models. Please contact application
engineering at AppEngineering.Department@ge.com.

Figure 3-4: L7044GSI 3D model

MANUALS
The available manuals for the engine are shown in “Table 3-3: Manuals”. Each engine will
come with a set of manuals shipped loose with the engine, but if additional manuals are re-
quired please contact application engineering at AppEngineering.Department@ge.com.

Table 3-3: Manuals

MANUAL FORM NUMBER Cyl. TYPE DESCRIPTION


6398-1 16 O&M P9394 with AFR2/emPact Emissions Control System
6378-2 16 Parts P9394 Parts Catalog
6376-1 16 R&O P9394 Repair and Overhaul
6388-1 12 O&M VHP Series Four 12-Cylinder with AFR2/emPact O&M
6390-1 12 Parts VHP 12 Cylinder AFR2/emPact Parts Catalog
6395-1 12 R&O VHP 12 Cylinder AFR2/emPact Repair and Overhaul

3 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Base Design Chapter 4

CHAPTER 4 - ENGINE BASE DESIGN


When a base (also referred to as a “skid”) is not supplied by Waukesha gas engines, the pack-
ager assumes responsibility for the base design. Any package being assembled outside of
the engine manufacturer should have a vibration study performed and tests completed for
assurance of installation integrity against vibration at the site. Information on engine unbal-
anced forces and moments can be found in the Waukesha gas engine technical data; vibra-
tion limits can be found in the Application and Installation section of Waukesha gas engine
service bulletins.

It is strongly recommended that the driven equipment be mounted on a common-skid with


the engine. By mounting both units on the same skid, a common plane for the engine and
driven equipment is created. The equipment is less likely to lose alignment, because the driv-
en equipment cannot shift relative to the engine.

When designing bases to be used with Waukesha gas engines, the engine base must be a
rigid design to maintain alignment between the engine and the driven equipment. Base flex-
ing due to lack of torsional rigidity is a major cause of misalignment. When designed correct-
ly, the base must offer rigidity adequate to oppose the twist due to torque reaction on drives
for driven equipment mounted on the base assembly and not bolted to the engine. The de-
sign must prevent any excessive bending forces that could be transmitted to the engine block
and any components in the drive train. A modal and torsional analysis must be performed to
validate the base design using Mass Elastic System Data (MESD) and maximum unbalanced
forces and moments data for the engine. MESD can be ordered as an option code (refer to the
Price Book). A third party engineering firm may be required to perform this analysis. shown
below, is an example of the skid used by Waukesha for power generation packages.

Driven
equipment

Engine

Figure 4-1: Example of genset base

The base must be designed according to the following:

• The entire package must be able to withstand normal handling during transportation
without permanently distorting the base or causing misalignment of the engine or driven
equipment.

• The base must limit torsional and bending moment forces caused by torque reaction and
flexing of the foundation substructure or vibration isolators under the base.

4 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 4 Engine Base Design

• The base must be free of linear and torsional vibration in the operating load and speed
range of the engine, and have a natural frequency such that resonance does not occur
during the machinery’s normal work.

• The base must maintain engine and driven equipment alignment under all operational
and environmental conditions.

Designs that rigidly mount the base to the foundation are preferred over using vibration isola-
tors. The use of isolators causes the base to react all of the transmitted torque and eliminates
the “path to ground” for the engine’s unbalanced forces.

Special consideration must be taken for bases designed for vibration isolators to ensure the
base is designed to limit torsional and bending moment forces and prevent flexing of the
base while mounted on vibration isolators. The base must maintain equipment alignment
under all conditions.

Vibration isolators between the driven equipment and skid, or engine and skid are not ac-
ceptable for use with Waukesha gas engines.

Skid designs with a step down base feature between the engine and driven is not recom-
mended and as an alternative, it is recommended that the mounting feet of the driven equip-
ment are modified to use a continuous I-beam skid design with one level plane for mounting
the engine and driven equipment. Separate skids for the engine and driven equipment are
not recommended due to the torque which is transmitted and must be reacted by the engine
and driven equipment skid. Also the risk of misalignment between the engine and driven
equipment increases when the skids are separate.

Mounting of any ancillary components by a packager may result in unwanted vibration of


those components. Appropriate lifting capability for lifting the complete package must be
provided as part of the base design. Engine lifting eyes are not to be used for lifting of a pack-
aged unit.

4 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Torsional Analysis Chapter 5

CHAPTER 5 - TORSIONAL ANALYSIS


All equipment with rotating components have inherent torsional vibrations that occur at
various speeds. Manufacturers design their equipment so these inherent vibrations are be-
low set limits and/or well outside its operating speed range. However, when equipment is
combined (i.e., engine to driven equipment, generator, compressor etc…) the combination will
have its own torsional characteristics where the torsional vibrations may exceed the limits in
the equipment’s operating range. This is why it is extremely important to perform or have a
torsional analysis performed on every unit.
Crankshaft torsional vibration refers to the angular twisting of the crankshaft relative to the
center of rotation. Since torsional vibration cannot be seen or felt by hand, it must be mea-
sured with special equipment.
The following engine situations may lead to excessive torsional vibration:
• Misalignment

• Bank to bank imbalance

• Uneven firing pressures

• Cylinder misfires

• Uneven ignition timing

• Incompatibility of the engine, couplings, and driven equipment

• Faulty vibration damper

To help limit the possibility of damage to the crankshaft, gear train, or coupling, vibration
dampers are mounted on the front of the engine to reduce torsional vibration. Dampers will
lose their ability to dampen as they age and therefore must be replaced. However, since
damper life cannot easily be determined, it is recommended that they be replaced at the
bottom-end overhaul service interval or in the event of a crankshaft failure. Waukesha rec-
ommends an initial sample at 2,000 hours after start-up. Then sample annually after initial
sample at 2,000 hours or sooner by damper manufacturer’s analysis and recommendations.
A torsional analysis must be performed to determine compatibility of the drive line compo-
nents when the components are used together for the first time. Waukesha can complete
a torsional analysis when supplied with the coupling and driven equipment information or
the engine mass elastic information can be supplied if another company will be doing the
torsional analysis.
Contact Waukesha’s Application Engineering department (AppEngineering.Department@
ge.com) to request either the mass elastic system data or a complete torsional analysis.

5 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 5 Torsional Analysis

5 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6

CHAPTER 6 - INSTALLATION
MOUNTING AND ALIGNMENT SUMMARY
• Properly designed and constructed inertia block

• Skid designed and analyzed for engine forces and vibrations

• Engine aligned per Waukesha’s procedure using correct shims and bolts

• Driven equipment aligned to the Waukesha engine

PREPARATION FOR MOUNTING


Waukesha engines should be mounted on an inertia block or a concrete pad with spring
isolators. These types of mounting are important as they help to isolate the engine and its
vibration from the surrounding structure and from other machines. The inertia block or pad
provides a level surface on which to mount the engine as well as a high level of isolation,
which reduces the noise and vibration level transmitted to surrounding buildings and ma-
chines. Waukesha recommends bolting the engine skid directly to the inertia block, without
spring isolators, to reduce the amount of vibration seen by the engine. The concrete upper
face shall be painted with hydrocarbon resistant paint to avoid concrete resistance proper-
ties alteration and/or finishing coping mortar stratification.

It is strongly recommended that the driven equipment be mounted on a common skid with
the engine (see “Figure 6-1: Engine and driven equipment on common skid”). By mounting
both units on the same skid, a common plane for the engine and driven equipment is creat-
ed. The equipment is less likely to lose alignment, because the driven equipment cannot shift
relative to the prime mover (engine).

Driven support Engine

Common skid

Inertia block

Figure 6-1: Engine and driven equipment on common skid

Waukesha strongly recommends the packager analyze skid design to determine that the
structural integrity of the skid does not incur harmful natural frequencies for constant speed
applications and throughout the speed range for variable speed applications.

To meet these demands, the inertia block or pad (spring isolated) must be of both adequate
size and mass to support the engine/driven equipment and to absorb vibration. The engine/
driven equipment common skid must rest on a surface of sufficient density to support both
the common skid and the equipment mounted on it. The inertia block or mounting pad must
have an accurately finished, level mounting surface. To secure the engine/driven equipment
to the inertia block or mounting pad, properly sized retaining bolts must be installed in the
correct spots to align with the holes in the engine base or common skid.

6 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation

DETERMINING INERTIA BLOCK OR PAD SIZE RECOMMENDED MINIMUM STANDARDS


Width of the inertia block or pad (W)

The inertia block or pad width is to be at least one foot (30.5 cm) wider than the base of the
engine or the common skid to be installed.

Length of the inertia block or pad (L)

The inertia block or pad length is to be at least one foot (30.5 cm) longer than the combined
length of the base of the engine and driven equipment to be installed.

Height of the inertia block or pad (H)

With the length and width of the inertia block controlled by the package dimensions, the
height will be controlled by the desired weight of the block. Waukesha recommends using a
foundation specialist to determine what inertia block weight and isolation will be required to
minimize vibration transmitted to the surrounding environment. Waukesha provides engine
unbalance forces and moments in the Drive Data section of the Tech Data. This information,
along with the driven machine unbalance information would be required to properly calcu-
late vibration transmission.

In the absence of calculations for the proper inertia block weight, Waukesha recommends
the weight of the inertia block equal 1.3 to 1.5 times the weight of all equipment mounted on
the inertia block or pad.

This includes accessory equipment and the weight of all liquids (coolant and oil) supported
by the inertia block.

Weights of Liquids

Water............................8.03 lb/gal (1.00 kg/liter)

Water/Glycol..............8.55 lb/gal (1.02 kg/liter)

Lube Oil........................7.60 lb/gal (0.91 kg/liter)

Engine capacities are listed in “Table 6-1: Engine liquid capacities”; any additional volumes in
customer supplied equipment or piping must be added if mounted on the inertia block.

Table 6-1: Engine liquid capacities

Jacket & Aux Water Lube Oil


 
gallons liters gallons liters
VHP 12-Cylinder 119 450 190 719
VHP 16-Cylinder 164 620 259 980

6 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6

L
W

Figure 6-2: Schematic of inertia pad

The depth of the inertia block can be found using the following:

H = (1.3 to 1.5)M
(L)(W)135

H = Depth of the inertia block

M = weight of engine in pounds

L = Length of inertia block (common skid length plus one foot)

W – Width of common inertia block (common skid width plus one foot)

135 = Density of concrete [lbs/ft3]

DETERMINING REQUIRED SOIL BEARING LOAD


The next step is to determine if the weight of an inertia block or pad of this size plus the weight
of the engine (and driven equipment, if mounted on a common skid) exceeds the safe soil
bearing load.

Sample calculations for determining the require soil bearing load can be found in the Appendix.

“Table 6-2: Soil bearing capacity” can be used to estimate if the supporting material at the
site will be sufficient to carry the required load. If the required soil bearing load exceeds sug-
gested standards, footings may have to be incorporated to give the inertia block or pad a
larger support area (see “Figure 6-3: Footing for poor bearing soil”).

Table 6-2: Soil bearing capacity

Safe Bearing Capactiy


Nature of Supporting Material
(Lbs. per square ft.) kG/m2
Hard rock – Granite, etc. 50,000 – 200,000 240,000 – 980,000
Medium rock – Shale, etc. 20,000 – 30,000 100,000 – 150,000
Hard pan 16,000 – 20,000 80,000 – 100,000
Soft rock 10,000 – 20,000 50,000 – 100,000
Compacted sand & gravel 10,000 – 12,000 50,000 – 60,000

6 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation
Safe Bearing Capactiy
Nature of Supporting Material
(Lbs. per square ft.) kG/m2
Hard clay 8,000 – 10,000 40,000 – 50,000
Gravel & coarse sand 8,000 – 10,000 40,000 – 50,000
Loose, medium and coarse sand,
6,000 – 8,000 30,000 – 40,000
compacted fine sand
Medium clay 4,000 – 8,000 20,000 – 40,000
Loose fine sand 2,000 – 4,000 10,000 – 20,000
Soft clay 2,000 15,000

Note: This table gives approximate values for average conditions. Building code re-
quirements may vary and should be consulted for a particular locality.

Normal soil Poor bearing soil

Figure 6-3: Footing for poor bearing soil

A suggested concrete mixture of one part cement, two parts sand and three parts aggre-
gate by volume, with a maximum slump of 4 inch (100 mm) providing a 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi (211 kg/cm2).

INERTIA BLOCK REINFORCEMENT


The concrete reinforcing network should be a 10 in. x 10 in. (254 mm x 254 mm) steel wire
fabric or equivalent which is 0.155 in. (3.9 mm) diameter minimum. It should be placed 2 inch-
es (51 mm) from the top and bottom surfaces with each level spaced 6 in. (152 mm) apart.

Common skid
Hex nut & flat washer
Shim
Liner

Convoluted tube sleeve

Mounting bolt

Reinforcing

Figure 6-4: Common skid mounted directly

6 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6
An alternate method of reinforcing is to place a level of 3/4 in. (19 mm) diameter reinforcing
rod, or equivalent, on 6 in. (152 mm) centers in both directions. A level should be placed 2
inches (51 mm) from the top and bottom surfaces. Rod placement should take into consider-
ation interference with inertia block or pad mounting bolts and sleeves.

VIBRATION ISOLATION
The inertia block or pad (spring isolated engine) is an important factor in isolating engine
vibration from the surrounding structure. Many times however this is not enough. There are
several additional techniques that can be used to isolate the vibration.

Isolating Liners

A liner can be fabricated and used to line the pit into which the concrete inertia block is
poured (see “Figure 6-5: Cross section of concrete inertia block”) A number of suitable liners
are available commercially. Consult the liner manufacturer for specific information. The prin-
ciple for all liners is the same – line the bottom and sides of the pit, and pour the concrete
inertia block inside of the isolator lining. The engine and/or common mounting skid will still
vibrate, but the vibration is dampened and largely confined within the liner.

Be sure to construct the liner so that no liquid concrete can flow into gaps between the liner
slabs. If concrete seeps between the inertia block and the pit, the vibration absorption value
of the liner will be greatly reduced.

Other materials such as sand or gravel may be used as isolating mediums. One foot of well
tamped, settled gravel under the inertia block will be satisfactory.

Do not bridge the gap between the inertia block and the surrounding floor with concrete or
a similar solid material. If for reasons of neatness or appearance it is necessary to close this
gap, use an expansion joint or a similar resilient material.

Isolation of inertia block from the building, convoluted tube sleeve and anchor bolt place-
ment, and a mounting pad area greater than engine base area may be noted in this illustra-
tion.

Anchor bolt

Engine mounting
surface

Inerita block

Liner

Concrete floor

Liner

Convoluted tube sleeve

Figure 6-5: Cross section of concrete inertia block

6 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation
Spring and Rubber Mounts

Spring and rubber mounts of various sizes and resiliencies are available for installation pur-
poses. These mounts can be positioned between the common skid and the inertia block or
pad or between the inertia block and bottom of the pit (see “Figure 6-6: Schematic of spring
isolator mounting pad construction”). As with the isolating liners, we recommend contacting
the manufacturer of the mounts for specific instructions.

For units installed in basements or on ground floors (no other floors beneath), neoprene waf-
fle type pads (50% vibration reduction) or the sandwich type pad of rubber and cork (75%
vibration reduction) can be used. Where engine-generator sets are to be installed above the
ground floor, the more critical type of isolators should be used.

Larger units should use spring type vibration isolators that provide about 95% isolation. All
percentages are approximate and exact information for your particular application should
be discussed with your Waukesha Distributor to be certain that the right type of isolator is
selected.

Common skid
Leveling screw
Adapter washer
Spring type isolater
Convoluted tube sleeve
in inertia block
Liner

Floor slab
Grouting

Mounting bolt

Reinforcing

Inerita block

Figure 6-6: Schematic of spring isolator mounting pad construction

INERTIA BLOCK BOLT OR PAD MOUNTING BOLT INSTALLATION


The inertia block or pad mounting bolts should be a minimum of SAE grade 5 bolt materi-
al. The bolt diameter will be determined by the hole diameter in the engine mounting base
or common skid frame. The bolts should be long enough to provide a minimum embedded
length of 30 times the bolt diameter, plus 3 – 4 in. (76 – 102 mm) for a hook. (The bolt should
have a “J” or “L” shaped hook on the non-threaded end to increase its holding power.) Approx-
imately seven more inches (178 mm) are needed to protrude above the top surface of the
inertia block or pad. These seven inches (178 mm) will provide the length needed for:

• The grout, (if used), 2 inches (51 mm)

• Sole plate, (if used), 3/4 inch (19 mm)

• Chock, 1/2 inch (13 mm)

6 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6
• Shims and engine base, 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm)

• Washer, nut and small variations in levelness, 7/8 inch (22 mm)

Common skid
Hex nut & flat washer
Rubber washer
Pad type isolater
Shim
Liner

Floor slab

Convoluted tube sleeve


in inertia block

Mounting bolt

Reinforcing

Grouting

Inerita block

Figure 6-7: Common skid mounted on pad type vibration isolators

For a common skid mounted engine, only 7 inches (140 mm) of bolt need protrude above the
inertia block or pad surface (see “Figure 6-8: Mounting bolt”).

Bolt placement in the inertia block or pad can be determined by making a template from 1 x 6
inch (25 x 1 52 mm) boards. Consult a Waukesha installation print for template information. (A
certified installation print can be made for your engine if ordered when the engine is ordered.)
Suspend the template over the inertia block or pad and hang bolts and sleeves through the
template holes (see “Figure 6-9: Template”). Seven inches (178 mm) of bolt must extend from
the top surface of the inertia block or pad.

4” Threaded

Extend to suit mounting

30 x D
+ Sleeve

15°

3-1/2”
Approx.

Figure 6-8: Mounting bolt

6 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation

Outboard bearing
Engine mounting Shaft centerline
mounting bolt holes
bolt holes

Figure 6-9: Template

A sleeve of convoluted plastic tubing 2 – 3 inches (51 – 76 mm) in diameter, should be placed
around the bolts before they are embedded in the concrete (see “Figure 6-10: Mounting
sleeves embedded in concrete”). This will allow the bolts to bend and conform to the dimen-
sions of the sole plate (if used) if the template was not exact. The sleeve may be 10 – 12 in.
(254 – 305 mm) long. The top end of the sleeve should be slightly above the top level of the
inertia block or pad so that the concrete will not spill into the sleeve and interfere with bolt
adjustments.

Convoluted mounting
Mounting bolt Template
sleeve (10-12”)

Foundation bolt Concrete


Liner
Forms

Figure 6-10: Mounting sleeves embedded in concrete

CURING THE INERTIA BLOCK OR PAD


Once the inertia block or pad is poured, it should be kept moist and protected until fully cured
according to the supplier’s requirements. A longer curing period may be required in adverse
weather.

Inertia blocks or pads poured in the winter must be insulated against the cold or have calcium
chloride incorporated into the mix.

Before the concrete curing advances too far, rough up the concrete surface to provide a good
bonding surface for the grout (if used).

6 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6
SOLE PLATES
Sole plates can be used to mount the engine to the inertia block (see “Figure 6-11: Cross
section of mounting using sole plates”). The plates distribute the weight of the engine evenly
over the top of the inertia block or pad. They also make up for any variations of the concrete
from level. When selecting material stock for the sole plates, select cold rolled steel 3/4 – 1
inch (19 – 25 mm) thick, and 4 inches (102 mm) wide minimum. The plates should run the full
length of the engine.

If the engine is common skid mounted, it may be less expensive to use several shorter sole
plates (if required). The plate should be as wide as the common skid flange. Sole plate lengths
are available on Waukesha installation drawings.

The sole plates should be clean and free from rust and scale. Mounting holes in the plates
should be drilled and tapped according to the instructions provided. Jack screws are to be
used in these holes which keep the sole plates in position while pouring the grout. Before the
inertia block or pad is fully cured, the surface should be roughened up to provide for a good
bond between the concrete and the grout. Position the sole plate over the inertia block or pad
bolts, and level the plates, keeping them a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) above the inertia
block or pad surface. Plates must be level lengthwise, and crosswise, relative to each other.
After leveling, tighten the nuts on the inertia block or pad bolts finger tight. This will help keep
the sole plates level while installing the grout.

Nut Washer
Engine base flange
Shims & chock
Grout Sole plate

2”

Convoluted tube
sleeve (10-12”)

Inertia block

Mounting bolt

6” 2”

Figure 6-11: Cross section of mounting using sole plates

6 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation
GROUTING
Grouting can be done only after the installation of the inertia block or pad has fully cured
and the sole plates (if used) have been positioned and leveled (see “Figure 6-12: Grouting the
inertia block”). On sole plate installations, grouting is important as it anchors the sole plates
in place. Since the sole plates support the engine, it is important that the grout be installed
properly to hold the plates level.

Engines and common skids can be mounted directly to the grout without the use of sole
plates. When this is done, the engine must be mounted and leveled before the grout is poured.
Shim and level the engine as described in Chapter 7: Mounting and Alignment. Pour the grout
under the engine base or common skid. After all grout has cured, back out the jacking screws
and fill with grout.

l Level
ve
Le
l
ve
Le
Grout

2”

2” Mounting bolts

Leveling screws

Additional vibration
Inertia block
insulation

Figure 6-12: Grouting the inertia block

GROUTING PROCEDURE
Make a form around the inertia block or pad. If possible, pour the grout from one point on
the inertia block or pad only, and allow the grout to flow under the common skid or engine
base rails. This pouring procedure will help lessen the chances of air pockets being trapped
between the engine and the inertia block or pad. Air pockets will lessen the contact area
between the grouting and the engine base or common skid, reducing support for the engine.
Also, a metallic based grout will expand into these spaces and force the engine out of align-
ment. If the pour point on the engine or common skid is slightly higher than the rest of the
inertia block or pad, the grout will flow more easily under the engine or common skid.

The best way to install a concrete, metallic based grout is to form wedge shaped grout pads
(see “Figure 6-13: Rear view of mounted engine”). These pads should run the length of the en-
gine or common skid. Slope the grout outward in a wedge shape towards the inertia block or
pad to provide better support. Sole plates can be embedded in this run of grout, or the engine
base can be installed directly on it.

The advantage of this grouting technique is that it will keep grout out from under the engine.
The grout will not be able to expand up into the hollow area under the engine base and force
the engine out of alignment.

6 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Installation Chapter 6

Grout Sole plate

Inertia block or pad

Figure 6-13: Rear view of mounted engine

Grouting should be worked into place using rods or chain lengths. Work the material gently
to avoid air entrapment.

When using sole plates, pour in enough grout to embed the plates 1/2 inch (13 mm) into the
grout. When sole plates are not used, never allow the grout to come up over the engine base
or common skid, to allow for future adjustments.

Follow the grout manufacturer’s instructions for applying the grout, and recommendations
for curing times. Concrete grouts must be sealed after curing. All metallic based grouts should
be sealed to prevent rust from destroying the grout.

If the grout is allowed to settle at a slight outward slope, oil and water will be able to run off
the inertia block or pad.

After the grout has cured, remove the leveling screws and remove any accumulation from the
common skid or engine base. Save enough grout to pour into the inertia block bolt sleeves
after the engine has been aligned.

Many epoxy grouts are also available which provide superior performance for these appli-
cations.

6 - 11 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 6 Installation

6 - 12 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

CHAPTER 7 - MOUNTING AND ALIGNMENT


MOUNTING SURFACE
This section discusses mounting surface requirements for Waukesha VHP engines.

Waukesha VHP engines require a very smooth and level mounting surface. This is to prevent
distortion of the main bearing bores in the crankcase and prevent movement from vibration
and thermal growth. Using shims to correct a rough distorted surface does not provide ade-
quate support under the engine.

“Figure 7-1: Machined surface mounting”, illustrates a surface leveled by machining then
shimmed and a surface leveled by shims alone.

Machined mounting surface Non-machined mounting surface

Figure 7-1: Machined surface mounting

The machined surface provides a much better support.

A level mounting surface can be provided by attaching 175 mm x 175 mm x 65 mm (7” x 7”


x 2.5”) chocks to the skid by welding or grouting. The engine mounting surface of the chocks
must be flat, smooth, and their planes parallel within 0.08 mm (0.003”) with a surface finish
of 500 RMS.

Mounting bolt

Skid
Welded or
Shims grouted

Figure 7-2: Shimming an engine

Shims of 127 mm x 127 mm (5” x 5”) are then used at each mounting bolt to correct base de-
flection and alignment. Appendix C ”VHP stainless steel spacers and shims” describes proper
shimming procedures and lists shims available from Waukesha.

7 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment

Adjustable engine shims or chocks are suitable for mounting Waukesha gas engines provid-
ed the installer follows the sizing and installation guidelines of the adjustable shim manu-
facturer. VHP engines require Vibracon SM24 or equivalent size. All original engine mounting
holes must be used, and the correct size for the size of the engine must be used. It is not
acceptable to use a smaller size shim to allow for clearance around the engine mounting pad
or original jacking bolt.

Adjustable engine shims may loosen over time, and engine alignment must be checked peri-
odically to ensure engine is in correct alignment at all times.

All of the mounting bolt positions are required to properly secure the engine. The jacking bolts
are used to raise the engine to shim for final crankshaft web deflection and alignment. An
anti-seizing dry lubricant must be applied to the jacking bolts before adjusting to prevent the
threads from locking. The jacking bolts can be removed and mounting bolts installed once
the engine is aligned to provide additional clamping force. If the jacking bolts are to remain in
place, they must be backed off to allow proper forging of the mounting bolts.

Mounting bolts should not be a tight fit through the holes in the engine and skid. The bolts
should either be slightly smaller than the engine mounting hole or the through hole in the
skid should be slightly larger than the bolt. The VHP engine mounting holes have a 7/8 in.
diameter. Bolts must be torqued base on what grade or class is used. Spacers should also
be implemented as seen in “Figure 7-1: Machined surface mounting”, to allow for proper bolt
stretch. Bolt stretch helps to keep tension on the bolt and prevents the bolt/nut from loosen-
ing due to the vibrations of the engine.

5
4
1

2
3

Item Description Qty Part Number


1 Spacer, Engine VHP 0.060 (Rear) 2 P316793
2 Spacer, Engine VHP 0.060 (Middle) 2 P316794
3 Spacer, Engine VHP 0.060 (Front) 2 P316795
4 Shim, Engine, 0.010 (Thick) 20 P310122
5 Shim, Engine, 0.005 (Thick) 20 P310121
6 Shim, Engine, 0.030 (Thick) 10 P310123
7* Shim, Engine, 0.002 (Thick) 10 P310316
*Not shown - required for alignment during installation, prior to startup

Figure 7-3: Shim locations for VHP 12-cylinder

7 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

4
3

3 1
1
1
1

Item Description Qty Part Number


1 Spacer, Engine VHP 0.060 (Rear) 6 P316793
2 Shim, Engine, 0.010 (Thick) 24 P310121
3 Shim, Engine, 0.005 (Thick) 24 P310122
4 Shim, Engine, 0.030 (Thick) 12 P310123
5* Shim, Engine, 0.002 (Thick) 12 P310316
*Not shown - required for alignment during installation, prior to startup

Figure 7-4: Shim locations for VHP 16- cylinder


See Appendix C for spacer and shim specifications.

MOUNTING PROCEDURES

SHIMMING
When shimming to adjust base deflection or alignment specifications, the shim packs should
contain no more than four of one size shim. If more than four are required, the next larger
thickness shim should be used. On VHP engines, separate shim packs must be used at each
mounting bolt and may not always be the same thickness.

7 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
DIAL INDICATOR MOUNTING
On skid mounted packages, tightening, loosening, and jacking of an engine mount during the
shimming process will cause deflection of the I-beam flange. Because of this, it is important
that the magnetic base or other clamping device for the dial indicator is attached to the web
of the I-beam base rather than to the flange (dial indicator kit tool #494288).

Engine base

Flange
Web

I-Beam

Figure 7-5: Correct Mounting

Engine base

I-Beam

Figure 7-6: Incorrect Mounting

7 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
LEVELING AND BASE DEFLECTION

SOLID MOUNTED PACKAGES


Solid mounted packages can be found in two arrangements:

• Engine and driven equipment are on a common skid which is bolted or grouted directly to
an inertia block or support structure.

• Engine and driven equipment are individually bolted or grouted to sole plates on an inertia
block.

Leveling – Common Skid-to-Inertia Block

1. Using a glass bubble level, check to see that the inertia block or support structure is even
and level at all mounting points. Use spacing plates or shims where necessary.

2. Install the package on the inertia block. Use a glass bubble level to determine if the unit
is level front to rear and side to side. Shim as required.

3. When unit is level, use a feeler gauge at each mounting point to determine if any air gaps
exist. Shim as required.

4. Add shims under the center mounts of the common skid to eliminate any sag.

5. Tighten the common skid to the inertia block mounting bolts.

6. For grouting, see Chapter 1 “Preparation For Mounting”.

Engine
Driven
equipment

Common skid

Inertia block or pad

Figure 7-7: Leveling – Common Skid-to-Inertia Block

Leveling – Individual Mounting

Follow common skid procedures for each unit.

Engine Base Deflection

Checking engine base deflection is important to assure that the main bearing bores are in
perfect alignment. Misaligned main bearing bores can cause premature failure of bearings
and/or bending and breakage of the crankshaft. On solid mounted packages, the “Corner Lift
Method” described below is quick and accurate for leveling an engine base and is, therefore,
the preferred method. The “Release Method” is described for your information but is not con-
sidered as accurate as the “Corner Lift Method” for leveling an engine base on solid mounted
packages.

Corner Lift Method

The following procedure provides a simple, quick method for 6 point mounting on solid
mounted installations.
7 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
1. The engine should be resting on four corner shim packs at least 0.125 in. (3.175 mm)
thick. Using the front or rear of the engine as a starting point, tighten the four corner
bolts (two each side, on one end). The four bolts at the opposite end should be loosened
or removed.

If a single bearing generator is attached, loosen the bolts connecting the generator adapter
pilot ring to the flywheel housing.

The center shim packs and mounting bolts must not be used at this point. If they are installed,
they should now be removed.

Engine block

Min.
0.125”
Center shims removed (3.175 mm)

I-Beam skid or pad

Figure 7-8: Corner Lift Method

2. Set up two dial indicators on the free end as shown below and zero the dials.

3. Using the jack screw, raise the left free corner of the engine until the indicator on the right
free corner reads 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). Record the left free corner indicator reading (see
Figure 2-9). Lower the left free corner of the engine back onto its shim pack.

Record this 0.001”


Jack bolt (0.025 mm)
reading

Engine base

I-Beam

Figure 7-9: Record the Left Free Corner Indicator Reading

4. Raise the right free corner until the left indicator reads 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). Record the
right free corner indicator reading (Figure 2-10).

7 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

Record this
0.001” Jack bolt
(0.025 mm) reading

Engine base

I-Beam

Figure 7-10: Record the Right Free Corner Indicator Reading

5. Calculate the difference between the two recorded corner readings. If the difference is
less than 0.010 in. (0.254 mm), the base deflection is satisfactory and the free corners
may be bolted down. If the difference is 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) or more, add shims equal to
1/2 of this difference under the corner that had the highest reading. Recheck per steps
2 and 3. Readings should now be within 0.010 in. (0.254 mm), and the corners can be
bolted down. The four corners are now in the same plane. Checking the opposite end is
not necessary.

6. The mounting points in the center of the engine now need to be shimmed. These are the
final two points in the six point mounting. These center support points will have some
amount of natural crankcase sag. While the engine is supported on the ends, the middle
of the case is unsupported, and it may sag (see Figure 2-11). This sag has to be compen-
sated for with the shimming procedure.

Engine base

Shims

Figure 7-11: Natural Crankcase Sag

• Verify all corner mounts are properly torqued (center bolts removed).

• Set up a dial indicator at the center mount. Zero the dial.

• Add enough shims under the center mounts to fill the air gap. Be careful not to bump the
dial indicator during this procedure.

• Replace the center bolts and torque the center mounts and then record the dial indicator
reading.

7 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
• Loosen a front or rear mount and install shims under the center mount as required until
the dial indicator reads:

+0.000 in (0.000 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder Extender Series*


+0.004 in. (0.102 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder with base style oil pan*
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm) for a VHP P9394GSI*
* With the center mounts properly torqued.

• If the dial indicator has not been moved or bumped, it should read positive by the amount
indicated above, compared to when it was first zeroed. The engine base is now level
with all the natural sag removed (see”Figure 7-12: Level Engine Base With Natural Sag
Removed”).

Engine base

Shims

Figure 7-12: Level Engine Base With Natural Sag Removed

Release Method

1. The release method is used to verify that base deflection is correct by measuring spring
up of each mounting point.

2. Starting at any engine mounting point, mount a dial indicator and zero the dial.

3. Loosen the mounting bolts at this point and record the dial reading.

4. Re-torque and verify that the dial indicator returns to zero.

5. Repeat for all mounting points.

6. Compare measurements from all 6 points. The 4 corners should have sprung equally
within 0.005 in. (0.127 mm).

NOTE: Spring-up at the center mounts should be zero because of the shims added to compen-
sate for crankcase sag.

Engine base

I-Beam

7 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
Figure 7-13: Release Method

Crankshaft Web Deflection

This check measures the deflection of a crankshaft during a revolution. It is the most direct
method of determining if the shaft is being bent by a deflected crankcase or driven equip-
ment misalignment. Web deflection measurements are required in marine engine applica-
tions. This procedure should also be used as a final check for base deflection and alignment
especially on packages where the “Corner Lift Method” is too difficult to use.

All current production VHP crankshafts have center punch marks to indicate the proper web
deflection gauge mounting locations. These marks are 5 in. (127.0 mm) from the connecting
rod journals and can be added to an unmarked crankshaft by using the counterweight part-
ing line as a reference point. On all fully counterweighted VHP crankshafts, the marks are
punched 0.185 in. (4.7 mm) inside the counterweight parting line.

1. Mount a web deflection gauge (tool #494424 digital or #494292 analog) in the punch
marks. Carefully twirl the gauge to make sure it is properly seated. All pistons and con-
necting rods should be in place during this procedure.

NOTE: Interference with the connecting rods will not allow measurement during the full 360×
shaft rotation.

2. Position the crankshaft so the deflection gauge hangs freely next to the connecting rod,
but as close to the rod as possible. Zero the gauge dial.

3. Slowly rotate the crankshaft until the gauge is in position 2, on the horizontal. Record any
positive or negative reading attained.

NOTE: Always check web deflection by rotating the crankshaft in the direction in which the
engine is rotating

Web deflection gauge

5” ±1/16”
127 mm ± 1.6 mm

Crankpin

Figure 7-14: Crankshaft Web Deflection

4. Rotate the crankshaft to positions 3 and then 4, recording any readings. Now rotate the
shaft further until the gauge is as high as possible, and yet still hangs free, without con-
tacting the connecting rod. Record this reading.

5. Remove the deflection gauge, and repeat this procedure on the other crankshaft webs.

• A total of 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) deflection, from positive to negative, is allowable on all but
the rear crankshaft throw. The rear throw will typically have 0.0015 in. (0.381 mm) deflec-
tion due to the effects of the flywheel weight.

7 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
• If deflection of the center throws exceeds 0.001 in. (0.025 mm), this can be corrected by
shimming the center mounts. Adding shims will close the crankshaft web at the bottom
while removing shims will open the crankshaft web at the bottom.

• High deflection on the rear throws could be caused by drive/driven-shaft misalignment or


by an excessively heavy single bearing machine.

• High deflection on the front throws could be caused by overtightened accessory belts.

NOTE: Position
indicator as close
to connecting rod
as possible

5 1

4 2 Position 2

Web deflection gauge

Viewed from rear of engine for opposite rotation engines


Viewed from front of engine for standard rotation engines

Figure 7-15: Locations For Checking Crankshaft Deflection

SPRING ISOLATED PACKAGES


On spring isolated packages the engine and driven equipment are solidly mounted to a com-
mon skid which rests on spring isolators. Beneath the spring isolators is a concrete mounting
pad, inertia block, or steel support structure.

Spring isolation is used to isolate the surrounding environment from engine and driven equip-
ment vibration. To do this effectively, the mounting points must be correctly spaced around
the center of gravity and the isolators adjusted properly.

Generator sets from Waukesha Power Systems have the isolator mounting holes correct-
ly spaced for uniform support of the package when filled with coolant and lube oil. When
supported uniformly, the spring lengths on all the isolators will be equal. The following is a
general procedure for adjusting spring type vibration isolators. For more specific instructions,
see the spring isolator manufacturer’s instructions.

Spring Isolator Installation

1. Check that all points where spring isolators will be fitted are even and level. Build up any
low spots using steel chocks until all isolator base plates are within 0.125 in. (3.175 mm)
elevation of each other.

2. Install spring isolators and bolt down, if required.

3. Loosen horizontal chocks (snubbers), if used.

4. Place engine/driven equipment package on the isolators. All isolators should have the
isolator top plate contacting the isolator base.

5. Turn the adjustment on each isolator down 2 full turns at a time until all isolators have at
least 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) between the top plate and the base.

7 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

0.125”
Adjustment (3.175 mm)
Top plate

Base

Snubber adjustment

Figure 7-16: Spring Isolator Mount

6. If the package is not level after adjusting the isolators, this will be corrected with further
adjustments. To level a unit side-to-side, make equal adjustments to all the isolators on
one side. Leveling a unit front to rear, where the isolators are spaced evenly, can be ac-
complished as follows:

• Turn the adjustment screw one turn on the pair of isolators next to the high end isolators.

• Turn the adjustment screw 2 turns on the third pair, 3 turns on the fourth pair, etc. Repeat
this as many times as necessary to level the skid.

Engine
Driven
Equipment

I-Beam Common skid

Inertia block

0 1 2 3
Turns Turns Turns Turns
Figure 7-17: Leveling Spring Isolators

7. With the engine running, adjust the horizontal chocks (snubbers), if equipped, for a mini-
mum of horizontal movement (minimal or no gap). Lock the adjustment bolt in place with
the lock nut.

Adjustment
Top plate

Slight
Snubber adjustment gap

Figure 7-18: Spring Isolator Mount

7 - 11 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
As stated earlier, when spring isolators are adjusted correctly, the spring lengths on all the
isolators will be equal. The formula below calculates what this spring length should be:

LL = FL – W
Kxn
Where:

LL = Length of springs when engine package is resting on them (inches) - loaded length

FL = Length of springs while unloaded (inches) - free length

W = Weight of engine package wet (lbs)

K = Spring constant of isolators (lbs/inch)

n = Number of isolators under package

When one isolator is compressed too far, it can be relieved by adjusting the surrounding iso-
lators down or by adjusting up on the subject isolator. Always maintain a minimum 0.125 in.
(3.175 mm) gap between the isolator base and top plate on all isolators.

Engine Base Deflection

Checking engine base deflection is important to assure that the main bearing bores are in
perfect alignment. Misaligned main bearing bores can cause premature failure of bearings
and/or bending breakage of the crankshaft.

Release Method

This method is used to determine base deflection by loosening each mounting point and
measuring spring-up. This procedure may be used when the skid is positioned on the adjust-
ed spring isolators.

1. Remove center shim packs.

2. Starting at any corner, mount a dial indicator and zero the dial.

3. Loosen the mounting bolts at this point and record the dial reading.

4. Re-torque the bolts and verify that the indicator dial returns to zero.

5. Repeat this step at the remaining 3 corners.

6. Compare the measurements from each of the 4 corners and then shim until the corners
spring equally within 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).

7. The mounting points in the center of the engine now need to be shimmed. These are the
final two points in the six point mounting. These center support points have some amount
of natural crankcase sag (see Figure 2-19). While the engine is supported on the ends, the
middle of the case is unsupported, and it will sag. This sag will be compensated for in the
shimming procedure.

7 - 12 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

Engine base

Shims

Figure 7-19: Natural Crankcase Sag

• Verify all corner mounts are properly torqued.

• Set up a dial indicator at the center mount. Zero the dial.

• Add enough shims under the center mounts to fill the air gap. Be careful not to bump the
dial indicator during this procedure.

• Re-torque the center mounts and then read the dial indicator.

• Loosen a front or rear mount and install shims under the center mount as required until
the dial indicator reads:

+0.000 in (0.000 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder Extender Series*


+0.004 in. (0.102 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder with base style oil pan*
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm) for a VHP P9394GSI*
* With the center mounts properly torqued.

• If the dial indicator has not been moved or bumped, it should read positive by the correct
amount from when it was first zeroed. The engine base is now level with all natural sag
removed (see Figure 2-20).

Engine base

Shims

Figure 7-20: Level Engine Base With All Natural Sag Removed

Crankshaft Web Deflection

This check measures the deflection of a crankshaft during one revolution. It is the most direct
method of determining if the shaft is being bent by a deflected crankcase or misalignment.
Web deflection measurements are required in marine applications. This procedure should
be used as a final check for base deflection and alignment on packages where the “Release
Method” is too difficult to use.

7 - 13 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
All current production VHP crankshafts have punch marks to indicate proper web deflection
gauge mounting locations. These marks are at 5 in. (127.0 mm) from the connecting rod jour-
nals and can be added to an unmarked crankshaft by using the counterweight parting lines
as a reference point. On all fully counterweighted VHP crankshafts, the marks are punched
0.185 in. (4.69 mm) inside the counterweight parting line.

1. Mount a web deflection gauge (tool #494424 digital or #494292 analog) in the punch
marks. Carefully twirl the gauge to make sure it is properly seated. All pistons and con-
necting rods should be in place during this procedure.

2. Position the crankshaft so the deflection gauge hangs freely next to the connecting rod,
but as close to the rod as possible. Zero the gauge dial.

Web deflection gauge

5” ±1/16”
127 mm ± 1.6 mm

Crankpin

Figure 7-21: Crankshaft Web Deflection

3. Slowly rotate the crankshaft until the gauge is in position 2, on the horizontal. Record any
positive or negative reading attained.

4. Rotate the crankshaft to positions 3 and then 4, recording any readings. Now rotate the
shaft further until the gauge is as high as possible, and yet still hangs free, without con-
tacting the connecting rod. Record this reading.

5. Remove the deflection gauge, and repeat this procedure on the other crankshaft webs.

• A total of 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) deflection from positive to negative is allowable on all but
the rear crankshaft throw. The rear throw will typically have 0.0015 in. (0.381 mm) due to
the affects of flywheel weight.

• If deflection of the center throws exceeds 0.001 in. (0.025 mm), this can be corrected by
shimming the center mounts. Adding shims will close the crankshaft web at the bottom.
Removing shims will open the crankshaft web at the bottom.

• High deflection on the rear throws could be caused by drive / driven shaft misalignment
or an excessively heavy single bearing machine.

• High deflection on the front throws could be caused by overtightened accessory belts.

7 - 14 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

NOTE: Position
indicator as close
to connecting rod
as possible

5 1

4 2 Position 2

Web deflection gauge

Viewed from rear of engine for opposite rotation engines


Viewed from front of engine for standard rotation engines

Figure 7-22: Location For Checking Crankshaft Deflection

Driven Equipment Base Deflection

Use the driven equipment manufacturer’s procedures and limits if available. Base deflection
can also be measured and adjusted using a “Release Method” similar to that described for
the engine.

1. Starting at any corner, mount a dial indicator and zero the dial.

2. Loosen the mounting bolts at this point and record the dial reading.

3. Re-torque and verify that the dial indicator returns to zero.

4. Repeat this procedure at the remaining 3 corners.

5. Compare measurements from the 4 corners and shim as required. When all corners spring
to within 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) of each other, the procedure is completed.

Driven equipment

I-Beam

Figure 7-23: Driven Equipment Base Deflection

7 - 15 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
ALIGNMENT

SINGLE BEARING GENERATOR AND SIMILAR SINGLE BEARING EQUIPMENT ALIGNMENT


Aligning single bearing equipment involves two steps: first, the driven shaft must be centered
in the flywheel pilot and second, the engine crankshaft and driven shaft must form a straight
line when viewed both horizontally and vertically.

Centering Pilot (Parallel Alignment)

To measure how well a shaft is centered in the flywheel pilot, a dial indicator must be clamped
to the flywheel housing or driven machine body. The dial indicator will then read the total
runout of the driven equipment input shaft.

1. Clean the shaft of any dirt, grease, rust or paint. Use emery cloth if necessary to insure a
smooth surface to measure from.

2. Mount a dial indicator to the flywheel housing or generator barrel and take the reading
from the shaft. Check for clearance before rotating the shaft.

3. Bar the engine over counterclockwise (facing the flywheel) and take your readings every
90×. A maximum of 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) Total Indicator Runout (TIR) is acceptable.

4. If runout exceeds 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) TIR.

• Roll the highest point to the top.

• Loosen the coupling bolts at this point to allow the shaft and coupling to drop in the fly-
wheel counterbore. Once all the bolts are loose, re-torque the bolts.

Coupling Dial indicator


Single bearing

Pilot
Stator

Driven shaft

Flywheel

Cooling fan

Figure 7-24: Single Bearing Generator

5. Repeat steps 2 and 3, and if TIR is still unacceptable the coupling bolts must be removed
and the driven equipment shaft rotated 90× with respect to the engine flywheel. Further
adjustments can be made by rotating in additional 90× increments, until the specifica-
tions are achieved.

Angular Alignment

To measure angular alignment, a dial indicator is mounted on the shaft of one machine and
reads against the shaft face on the other machine. In the case of a single bearing generator,
the dial indicator can be clamped to the fan and measures from the flexplate-to-flywheel
mounting bolt.

Before taking readings, roll the shaft in reverse rotation 45×, then back 45×, and zero the dial
indicator. This sets the axial position of the crankshaft and the driven machine shaft.

7 - 16 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

Genrator fan Flywheel

Figure 7-25: Angular Alignment-Single Bearing Generator

To measure the angular alignment, four dial indicator readings are required; one each at
the 12:00, 9:00, 6:00, and 3:00 o’clock positions. Readings at the 12:00 and 6:00 o’clock po-
sitions determine the vertical alignment and readings in the 3:00 and 9:00 o’clock positions
determine the horizontal alignment (see “Figure 7-26: Dial Indicator Reading Positions When
Measuring Angular Alignment”).

12:00

9:00 3:00

6:00

Figure 7-26: Dial Indicator Reading Positions When Measuring Angular Alignment

A total indicator reading (TIR) is the difference between two readings on opposite sides of the
shaft. In the example illustrated (see “Figure 7-27: Total Indicator Reading (TIR)”), the horizon-
tal TIR is (-0.009) and (+0.004) which is a difference of 0.013 in. (0.330 mm) or 13 thousandths
of an inch TIR. Vertical TIR is (0) and (+0.005) which is a difference of 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) or 5
thousandths of an inch TIR.

7 - 17 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment

-0.009 +0.004

+0.005

Figure 7-27: Total Indicator Reading (TIR)

The shaft shown (single bearing machine) is angularly misaligned from that of the engine.
This could be either vertical or horizontal misalignment. In the case pictured, the distance “S”
divided by the distance to the bearing (or rear mount) “L” is equal to 1/2 TIR divided by the
radius from the dial indicator to the center of the shaft “R”.

More simply:
S
L
= 1/2R(TIR)

Thus, we find that the amount of shimming or horizontal sliding required is:

S = L × (1/2 TIR)/R

This relationship is used with the outboard mount or any inboard mount (closer to the fly-
wheel) as long as the distance to the required mount is used for “L”.

Figure 7-28: Exaggerated Example

Vertical adjustments are made by adding or removing shims from the mounts on each end of
the machine. The L.H. and R.H. inboard mounts are adjusted the same, and the L.H. and R.H.
outboard mounts are adjusted the same.

7 - 18 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

Engine
Driven equipment

I-Bean common skid

Outboard mount Inboard mount

Figure 7-29: Add Or Remove Shims From The Mounts On Each End Of The Machine To Make Vertical
Adjustments

Horizontal adjustment is made by loosening all the mounting bolts and physically forcing the
driven equipment to the desired side. This can be done with a jacking screw or a pry bar in
the bolt hole. Dial indicators should be set up to monitor how far the machine is moved, or as
an alternate method, the shaft can be rotated to the 3:00 or 9:00 o’clock position and adjust-
ments made until 1/2 TIR is indicated by the angular dial indicator.

Face dial
indicator in
9:00 position
Fan

Figure 7-30: Dial Indicator Positioning

Angular alignment is acceptable when the TIR in all directions is less than 0.005 in. (0.127 mm)
measured at the flexplate-to-flywheel bolt which is 14 in. (355.6 mm) from the shaft center.

Thermal Growth

Once the drive/driven shaft alignment is acceptable, the vertical thermal growth of the en-
gine and driven machine must be compensated.

7 - 19 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
The following table lists the changes in crankshaft height that will occur due to the tempera-
ture change from 70° F (21° C) to normal operating temperatures. This is measured from the
mounting surface of the base type oil pan on VHP engines.

Table 7-1: Thermal Growth

INCREASE IN CRANKSHAFT HEIGHT


ENGINE MODEL
INCHES mm
VHP 12-Cylinder 0.014 0.36
VHP 16-Cylinder 0.017 0.43

Thermal growth information for the driven machine should be available from the manufac-
turer. If not, it can be calculated with the following formula:

Gm = (Tm -70) x h x E for °F or (Tm-20) x h x E for °C

Where:

Gm = amount of growth expected (inches or mm)

Tm = operating temperature of driven machines (°F or °C)

h = height from machine mounting surface to center of shaft (inches or mm)

E = thermal expansion coefficient for material machine is made from:

6.5 x 10-6 (0.0000065) in/in °F or 1.2 x 10-6 mm/mm °C for steel

5.8 x 10-6 (0.0000058) in/in °F or 1.1 x 10-6 mm/mm °C for cast iron

To compensate when there is a growth difference, align the machine with less growth higher
than the machine with more growth.

For example, if a generator grows 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) and an engine grows 0.014 in. (0.356
mm), the generator should be shimmed 0.014 in. (0.356 mm) – 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) = 0.009 in.
(0.229 mm) higher than the engine. This is done after the machines are initially aligned. The
shims go under all mounts of the generator. When checking angular alignment, the vertical
TIR will now be off but will fall within the limits once the engine and generator reach operating
temperature.

Crankshaft End Play

After completing the cold alignment, the crankshaft end play should be checked.

1. Clamp a dial indicator to the flywheel housing and read against the crankshaft or flywheel
face.

2. Pry the shaft forward and zero the dial indicator. (It may be necessary to remove an oil
pan door and wedge a pry bar between a crankshaft web and main bearing cap to move
the shaft forward).

3. Pry the shaft rearward. The shaft should not “bounce” forward and the dial indicator
should read within the service manual specifications. For VHP 12-cylinder engines the
crankshaft endplay should be between 0.005 and 0.016 inches (0.127 and 0.406 mm).

7 - 20 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

Figure 7-31: Checking Crankshaft End Play

Air Gap

On single bearing generators, the air gap between the stator and armature and at the ex-
citer should be checked to verify that adequate clearance exists. Correcting the air gap is
accomplished by adjusting the position of the inboard feet of the generator. Single bearing
induction generators have a very small clearance so it is important that these be checked
very carefully.

Some generator fans use set screws to hold the axial position of the fan. Verify that these set
screws are tight and that the fan hub bolts are properly torqued.

Hot Check

When the alignment, end play, and air gap are adjusted, the engine and generator set should
be run up to operating temperature under load for at least one hour. Then shut down the unit
and check alignment, end play, and air gap. If it is within specifications, then the alignment
is complete.

7 - 21 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
Periodic Inspection

Engine base deflection and alignment must be checked periodically, at least once a year.
Installations which are subject to settling of the concrete must be checked monthly initially,
to determine if settling is causing any misalignment.

Strator/exciter
air gap

Strator/armature
air gap

Figure 7-32: Single Bearing Generator

Multi-Bearing Machines

A multi-bearing machine is one which fully supports its own shaft, and does not rely on the
engine shaft to support the driven end.

Three areas must be adjusted to accurately align a multi-bearing machine to an engine,


which is also a multi-bearing machine. These are: End Play, Angular Alignment and Parallel
Alignment.

When aligning two multi-bearing machines, one machine must be designated as the station-
ary machine, and one as the movable machine. Deciding which machine will be stationary
will depend on size, weight, and connections. All adjustments will be made on the movable
machine.

Adjusting angular and parallel alignment on multi-bearing machines requires correcting the
angular alignment first and then the parallel. Once alignment is acceptable, the machines
must be shimmed to compensate for thermal growth.

The Waukesha alignment computer (Part Number 475063 or most current) finds djustments
for angular and parallel alignment as well as thermal growth, after the user inputs the dimen-
sion, growth and measuring information. Only one or two adjustments are normally required
to place the units within the alignment specifications, when this tool is used.

If the alignment computer is not available, the following procedures will provide an accurate
alignment.

End Play

To adjust end play:

1. Roughly position the two machines and install the shaft coupling. Adjust the distance be-
tween the two machines so that there is no apparent tension or compression on the cou-
pling. Properly space gear type couplings per the coupling manufacturer’s specifications.

2. Set up a dial indicator on the machine with the least end play (normally the engine). Clamp
the dial indicator to the engine flywheel housing and read against the flywheel face.

7 - 22 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
3. Pry the crankshaft fully forward, and zero the dial indicator. (Moving the crankshaft on a
VHP engine may require removing an oil pan door and prying between a main bearing cap
and crankshaft cheek or web).

4. Pry the shaft rearward and read the dial indicator. Crankshaft end play should be within
service manual specifications and the shaft should not spring-back when the bar is re-
moved.

5. If there is insufficient end play or if spring-back occurs, adjust the distance between the
machines until it is resolved.

Vertical misalignment

Horizontal misalignment

Proper alignment

Figure 7-33: Angular Alignment

Angular Alignment

To measure the angular alignment, a dial indicator is mounted to the coupling half of one
machine to read against the coupling half face of the other. The coupling should be installed
or the shafts bound together so they both turn together while taking the alignment measure-
ments.

The radius “R” from the center of the shaft to the dial indicator should be at least 7 in. (177.8
mm).

7 - 23 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
Before taking readings, roll the shaft 45° in reverse rotation and then back 45° in standard
rotation and zero the dial indicator. This sets the axial position for both the engine and driven
machine shafts.

Driven Driven
coupling coupling
“R”
half half

Figure 7-34: Measuring Angular Alignment

To measure angular alignment, four dial indicator readings are required; one each at the
12:00, 9:00, 6:00 and 3:00 o’clock positions which are taken while turning the engine in the
standard direction of rotation.

12:00

9:00 3:00

6:00

Figure 7-35: Dial Indicator Reading Positions When Measuring Angular Alignment

Readings taken at the 12:00 and 6:00 o’clock positions determine vertical angular alignment
and readings in the 3:00 and 9:00 o’clock positions determine horizontal angular alignment. A
total indicator reading (TIR) is the absolute difference between two readings on opposite sides
of the shaft. In the illustration, the horizontal TIR is (-0.009) and (+0.004) which is a difference
of 0.013. Vertical TIR is (0) and (+0.005) which is a difference of 0.005 in. (0.127 mm).

7 - 24 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

-0.009 +0.004

+0.005

Figure 7-36: Total Indicator Reading (TIR)

The illustration shows the shaft of a multi-bearing machine with both angular and parallel
misalignment.

Figure 7-37: Multi-bearing driven equipment

This could represent either vertical or horizontal misalignment since the principles are the
same for both.

Correcting this misalignment first involves correcting angular alignment, thus getting the
shaft centerline to line up on line B.

The amount of correction required to bring the centerline into alignment with line B, can be
determined from the dial indicator TIR, radius to the indicator “R”, and distance “L” from the
coupling to the mounts.
Outboard Inboard
mount mount

1 / 2 (TIR ) So Si
= =
R Lo Li

Therefore:
Lo x 1 / 2 (TIR )
So =
R

and

Li x 1 / 2 (TIR )
Si =
R
“So” is the amount of adjustment at distance “Lo” which is the distance from the center of the
coupling to the center of the outboard mount.

“Si” is then the adjustment at a mount distance of “Li” from the coupling.

7 - 25 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
The adjustment should be made to close the open side of the coupling (see “Figure 7-38:
Adjusting coupling”).

Closed side
Adjust this
direction Adjust this
direction

Flywheel
Open side
Figure 7-38: Adjusting coupling

Adjustment for angular alignment should then take place as follows:

1. Set up two dial indicators, one to monitor horizontal movement of the inboard mounts,
one to monitor horizontal movement of the outboard mounts. Zero the indicators (see
“Figure 7-39: Adjusting for angular alignment”).

driven equipment
Engine

Dial indicators

Figure 7-39: Adjusting for angular alignment

2. Going to one corner at a time, loosen the mounting bolt and shim as calculated, then
tighten the mounting bolt. Center mounts will have to be shimmed in conjunction with
corner mounts. Note any horizontal movement that may occur on the dial indicators.

3. After shimming, loosen both mounts on one end and all center mounts. It may also be
necessary to loosen one mount on the fixed end but do not loosen both. Slide the free end
the amount calculated, then re-torque the bolts (see “Figure 7-40: Slide free end”).

driven equipment
Engine

Figure 7-40: Slide free end

4. Loosen both bolts on the opposite end and move as calculated. Re-torque all mounting
bolts (see “Figure 7-41: Move opposite end”).

7 - 26 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7

driven equipment
Engine

Figure 7-41: Move opposite end

5. Check angular alignment again using the same procedure as used previously. Angular
alignment is correct when total indicator runout is less than 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) per foot
of radius from center of shaft to where the dial indicator reads (see “Figure 7-42: Correct
angular alignment”).

driven equipment
Engine

Figure 7-42: Correct angular alignment

Parallel Alignment

Parallel alignment can be checked and adjusted after angular alignment has been complet-
ed. It will, however, be necessary to re-check angular alignment after each adjustment. The
following procedure can be used to measure parallel alignment.

1. Set up a dial indicator to read parallel alignment. If available, set up a second dial indica-
tor to read angular alignment. This will allow you to rotate the shafts only one time to get
both readings (see “Figure 7-43: Measuring For Parallel Alignment”).

2. Rotate both shafts to the 2:00 o’clock position (facing the flywheel) then back to the 12:00
o’clock position. Zero the indicator(s).

3. Rotate the shafts to the 9:00 o’clock position and record the readings.

4. Rotate the shafts to the 6:00 and 3:00 o’clock positions and record the readings.

5. Rotate the shafts back to the 12:00 o’clock position and verify that the indicators return
to zero.

7 - 27 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
The amount of parallel misalignment is one-half the TIR (total indicator reading) for each
direction.

Read Read
angular parallel
alignment alignment

Driven Driven
coupling coupling
half half

Figure 7-43: Measuring For Parallel Alignment

In this example, the vertical TIR is 0.020 in. (0.508 mm), thus the machines are vertically mis-
aligned by 0.010 in. (0.254 mm). Horizontal TIR is the difference between (+0.015) and (+0.005)
which is 0.010 in. (0.254 mm). Horizontal misalignment is 1/2 of the TIR which is 0.005 in.
(0.127 mm). All mounts should get the same amount of adjustment, 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) in
this case, to move the machine without losing angular alignment.

-0.009 +0.004

+0.005

Figure 7-44: Total Indicator Reading (TIR)

Adjustment for parallel alignment is similar to that for angular and should be accomplished
as follows:

1. Set up two dial indicators; one to monitor horizontal movement of the inboard mounts,
and one to monitor horizontal movement of the outboard mounts. Zero the indicators.

2. Going to one corner at a time, loosen the mounting bolt(s) and shim as calculated, then
torque the mounting bolt. Center mounts will have to be shimmed in conjunction with
corner mounts.

3. After shimming, loosen both mounts on one end and all center mounts. It may also be
necessary to loosen one mount on the fixed end but do not loosen both. Slide the free end

7 - 28 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
the amount calculated then re-torque the bolts.

4. Loosen both mounts on the opposite end and move the same. Retorque all mounting
bolts.

5. Check parallel alignment again using the same procedure as used previously. Parallel
alignment is correct when total indicator runout is less than 0.005 in. (0.127 mm).

Vertical misalignment

Horizontal misalignment

Proper alignment

Figure 7-45: Parallel alignment

Thermal Growth

After angular and parallel alignment are satisfactory, it will be necessary to adjust alignment
to compensate for thermal growth. This will allow the machines to be in good alignment after
they reach operating temperature.

Crankshaft Growth

The following table lists the changes in crankshaft height that will occur due to the tempera-
ture change from 70° F (21° C) to normal operating temperatures (measured from the mount-
ing surface of the base type oil pan).

7 - 29 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
Table 7-2: Thermal Growth

INCREASE IN CRANKSHAFT HEIGHT


ENGINE MODEL
INCHES mm
VHP 12-Cylinder 0.014 0.36
VHP 16-Cylinder 0.017 0.43

Heat growth information for the driven equipment should be available from the manufactur-
er. If not, it can be calculated with the following formula:

Gm = (Tm -70) x h x E for °F or (Tm-20) x h x E for °C

Where:

Gm = amount of growth expected (inches or mm)

Tm = operating temperature of driven machines (°F or °C)

h = height from machine mounting surface to center of shaft (inches or mm)

E = thermal expansion coefficient for material machine is made from:

6.5 x 10-6 (0.0000065) in/in °F or 1.2 x 10-6 mm/mm °C for steel

5.8 x 10-6 (0.0000058) in/in °F or 1.1 x 10-6 mm/mm °C for cast iron

To adjust for thermal growth take the difference in machine growths and add that amount
in shims under the machine which grows least. In the case of cooling compressors, the com-
pressor gets cold when loaded and shrinks. This will require a further offset to compensate
for engine growth and compressor shrinkage. The growth formula still applies for a cold com-
pressor since the growth number will be negative.

To add the shims, loosen one mount at a time and add the shims then re-torque the bolts
before moving on to the next mount. This prevents horizontal alignment from changing while
adding shims. Parallel dial indicator readings will now indicate the machine which grows
least is higher than the machine which grows more but the machines will be aligned when
they reach operating temperature.

Check end play to verify that the alignment procedure did not eliminate end thrust.

Doweling

If doweling of the machines is required, the following information is offered as a guide.

Doweling is a practice often used after aligning two machines to mark their correctly aligned
positions. When dowels are placed correctly, they also determine the direction of thermal
growth of the machines. The drawing below illustrates where dowels should be placed to
cause thermal growth in a direction which will not affect crankshaft end play and will main-
tain correct alignment.

Tapered dowels are recommended for this purpose because they have the following advan-
tages over straight dowels;

1. Tapered dowels will not fall through the skid from vibration or a slight gap between the
hole and dowel.

2. If alignment changes from shipping of the complete package or settling of its foundation,
the machines can be realigned and the tapered holes reamed deeper to fit the dowel in
its new position.

7 - 30 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
3. Tapered dowels are removed easily by driving the pin out the large end.

Dowel holes should be drilled through the mounting foot, shim pack and the skid Ibeam
flange. No gaps should exist between the engine base and the skid.

Dowel locations

Driven equipment Engine

Dowel locations

Figure 7-46: Dowel Placement

Engine components and fluids are extremely hot after the engine has been shut down.
Contact with hot components or fluids can cause severe personal injury or death. Wear
protective clothing and eye protection protection during the hot check of crankshaft de-
flection.

Hot Check

Once the machines are aligned and offset for thermal growth, they should be checked when
hot.

1. Start the engine and apply load.

2. Allow machines to run for one hour after reaching their operating temperatures.

Ensure that all tools and other objects are removed from the unit and any driven equip-
ment before starting the unit. Running equipment can eject objects at great force, result-
ing in severe personal injury or death.

3. Shut down and immediately check angular and parallel alignment and end play. Align-
ment TIR should now be less than 0.005 in. (0.127mm) for the VHP, both parallel and an-
gular.

4. Adjust alignment and end play if necessary.

Periodic Inspections

Engine base deflection and alignment must be checked periodically, at least once a year.
Installations which are subject to settling of the concrete must be checked often (initially –
monthly) to determine if settling is causing misalignment.

7 - 31 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
ALIGNMENT CHECKLIST
Single Bearing Machine

NOTE: Values in the checklist are mentioned for VHP.

1. Install and level engine or common base _________________________________________

2. Adjust spring isolaters (if used)__________________________________________________

3. Adjust base deflection at the four engine corners.

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

4. Shim center mounts

+0.000 in (0.000 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder Extender Series*


+0.004 in. (0.102 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder with base style oil pan*
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm) for a VHP P9394GSI*
* With the center mounts properly torqued.

5. Measure crankshaft web deflection (optional)

All except rear throw 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) TIR max.
Rear throw approximately 0.0015 in. (0.038 mm) TIR.

Throw 1 2 3 4
TIR 0. 0. 0. 0.
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

Throw 5 6 7 8
TIR 0. 0. 0. 0.
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

6. Adjust base deflection at four corners of driven machine.

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

7 - 32 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
7. Check and adjust shaft pilot centering (parallel alignment). Maximum 0.005 in. (0.127 mm)
TIR.

0.
in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0.
in. (mm)

8. Check and adjust angular alignment. Maximum 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) TIR at flywheel bolt.

0.
in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0.
in. (mm)

9. Adjust for vertical growth

Engine Growth _____________ in. (mm) minus

D. M. Growth _____________ in. (mm) =

Cold Alignment Offset _____________ in. (mm)

10. Check crankshaft end play _____________ in. (mm) should be within service manual spec-
ifications.

11. Check air gap and fan set screws (single bearing generator) _____________

12. Start engine, run loaded, allow to warm up 1 hour minimum _____________

13. Shutdown and check hot angular alignment and end play

End play (Hot) _____________ in. (mm)

Alignment:

Parallel (Hot) Angular (Hot)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0. 0. 0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

7 - 33 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment
Multiple Bearing Machine

1. Install and level engine or common skid _____________________________

2. Adjust spring isolaters (if used) ____________________________________

3. Adjust base deflection at the four engine corners.

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

4. Shim center mounts

+0.000 in (0.000 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder Extender Series*


+0.004 in. (0.102 mm) for a VHP 12-cylinder with base style oil pan*
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm) for a VHP P9394GSI*
* With the center mounts properly torqued.

5. Measure crankshaft web deflection (optional)

All except rear throw 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) TIR max.

Rear throw approximately 0.0015 in. (0.038 mm) TIR.

Throw 1 2 3 4
TIR 0. 0. 0. 0.
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

Throw 5 6 7 8
TIR 0. 0. 0. 0.
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

6. Adjust base deflection at four corners of driven machine.

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

0. in. (mm) 0. in. (mm)

7 - 34 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Mounting and Alignment Chapter 7
7. Check for crankshaft end play.

8. Check and adjust angular alignment. Maximum 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) per foot of radius from
center of shaft to dial indicator read point.

0.
in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0.
in. (mm)

9. Check and adjust parallel alignment. Maximum 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) TIR.

0.
in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0.
in. (mm)

10. Adjust for thermal growth

Engine Growth _____________ in. (mm) minus

D. M. Growth _____________ in. (mm) =

Cold Alignment Offset _____________ in. (mm)

11. Recheck crankshaft end play _____________ in. (mm)

12. Start engine, run loaded, allow to warm up 1 hour minimum _____________

13. Shutdown and check hot angular alignment and end play

End play (Hot) _____________ in. (mm)

Alignment:

Parallel (Hot) Angular (Hot)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

0. 0. 0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)

0. 0.
in. (mm) in. (mm)

14. Dowel inboard machine mounts (if required).

7 - 35 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 7 Mounting and Alignment

Endplay before alignment______________________ End play after alignment_______________________


Engine model________________________________ Serial No.____________________________________
Driven machine make_________________________ Model No.___________________________________
Customer’s observer__________________________ Performed by________________________________
Date_______________________________________

Figure 7-47: Alignment progression chart

7 - 36 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Lifting Chapter 8

CHAPTER 8 - ENGINE LIFTING

Exercise extreme care when moving the engine or its components.


Never walk or stand directly under an engine or component while
it is suspended. Always consider the weight of the engine or the
components involved when selecting hoisting chains and lifting
equipment. Be positive about the rated capacity of lifting equip-
ment. Use only properly maintained lifting equipment with a lift-
ing capacity which exceeds the known weight of the object to be
lifted.

ALWAYS include the weight of the engine, the components and the
lifting device to ensure the lifting equipment’s capacity is not ex-
ceeded when calculating the weight to be lifted.

Always inspect lifting device and hardware for cracks and or other
damage before attempting to lift the engine.

VHP engines will be supplied with a skid that is suitable for shipping but is not to be used for
mounting or operating the engine.

VHP Enginators include the generator and a skid suitable for shipping and mounting. Specific
lifting instructions will be provided with each Enginator order.

The lifting eyes on the VHP engines are bolted to the engine crankcase and do not need to be
removed during normal engine operation. A 9-1/2 ton W.L.L. (Working Load Limit) standard
anchor shackles equipped with screw pins are required to be used with lifting the engine. The
shackles are not supplied by Waukesha. The engine lifting eyes are only meant for lifting the
engine. Do not use to lift driven or auxiliary equipment that may be attached to the engine.

Lifting chains should be positioned so that they do not rub or bind against parts of the engine.
A properly rigged engine will be able to be lifted in such a manner that the chains will not
damage the engine. Spreader beams are also available for purchase from Waukesha, refer
to the latest Special Tools Catalog for more information.

8 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 8 Engine Lifting

Table 8-1: Lifting specifications

Weight
Engine LB KG
L5794GSI 24,760 11,230
L7042GSI S4 24,760 11,230
L7044GSI 24,760 11,230
P9394GSI 33,887 15,371

Figure 8-1: Typical lifting shackle

Follow approved rigging procedures to ensure that no undue


strain is placed on the lifting eyes and hoisting chains/cable sling
when the engine is raised. Use the proper spreader beam to avoid
damage to the engine.

8 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Lifting Chapter 8

Figure 8-2: Correct Method of Lifting Engine – Rear View VHP 12-Cylinder

Figure 8-3: Correct Method of Lifting Engine – Side Views VHP 12-Cylinder

8 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 8 Engine Lifting

Lifting Eye

Figure 8-4: Lifting Eye Mounting VHP 16-Cylinder

8 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Cooling System Chapter 9

CHAPTER 9 - COOLING SYSTEM


COOLING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
• Radiator sized using site specific engine data from EngCalc or Special Application Approv-
al (SAA)

• Radiators installed considering prevailing winds at the site. Install radiators so they are not
adversely affected by other heat sources on site.

• Static pressure lines connected to the inlet of each pump providing a static inlet pressure
of 2 – 22 psig (0.14 – 1.5 bar), or 4.6 – 50 ft (1.4 – 15.2 m) of water head.

• Vent lines installed at high points of the engine for both JW and AW circuits

−− Vent lines continuously sloping upwards to expansion tank

−− Vent lines should be 1/4” in diameter on systems with vent lines less than 10 feet (3
meters) long, or 1/2” diameter with a 1/4” orifice on systems with vent lines more than
10 feet (3 m) long.

• Separate expansion tank for each circuit sized for desired coolant makeup volume plus an
additional air space equal to 11% of total cooling system volume. The air space will allow
for coolant expansion as it heats up and allows air to compress and increase the coolant
system pressure. A 7 psig (0.48 bar) pressure cap should also be included.

• Flexible connections installed on all connections to the engine including static pressure
lines and vent lines.

• Jacket water heater systems installed when ambient air temperature is less than 50°F
(10°C)

• Piping properly supported not to exert any additional forces on engine connections

• External cooling system restriction is less than maximum external restriction limits pub-
lished in tech data on S-5136-34 and S-96543-36

• Industrial natural gas engine coolant that meets Waukesha’s water treatment guidelines
in technical data document S-7610-3

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
S-6699-7 Cooling system guidelines

S-7610-3 Water treatment guidelines

S-7424-1 Inlet Pressure Requirements for Jacket Water Pump

S-8472-2 Cooling system schematic

S-8473-2 Elevated Ambient Air Temperature and Altitude Correction to Heat Rejection

EngCalc Engine data program for site specific heat rejection

S-5136-34 VHP 12-cylinder jacket water pump performance

S-6543-36 VHP 12-cylinder auxiliary water pump performance

S-8473-2 Elevated Ambient Air Temperature and Altitude Correction to Heat Rejection

9 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 9 Cooling System

S-5136-35 16-Cylinder jacket water pump performance

S-6535-17 16-Cylinder auxiliary water pump performance

S-7232-437 16-Cylinder Front End Drive Instructions

COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW


VHP engines consist of two separate cooling circuits, one circuit for the engine jacket water,
one circuit for the intercooler and oil cooler. Both circuits include engine gear driven water
pumps, mechanical thermostats, and bypass piping. The jacket water circuit consists of cool-
ing the engine cylinders, cylinder heads, and turbocharger bearing housings and maintains
an engine outlet temperature of 180°F (82°C) with the engine mounted thermostat. The aux-
iliary water circuit cools the charge air intercooler and lube oil cooler while maintaining an
engine inlet temperature of 130°F (54°C).

RADIATOR SIZING
Engine cooling is typically performed using an externally mounted radiator or cooler. For gas
compression applications, this is typically a separate core cooler that is used to cool both the
jacket water and auxiliary water circuits on the engine as well as the gas compression stages.
When sizing the cooler for the engine circuits, EngCalc or a Special Application Approval (SAA)
must be used to determine site specific engine data which is dependent on the ambient tem-
peratures, site elevation, engine operating point, and fuel composition. Engine heat rejection
data will be provided for all systems, and it is recommended to use the high end of the heat
rejection data tolerance, as well as an additional safety and fouling factor to ensure the cool-
er is sized to prevent overheating the engine.

The temperature rise across the engine will vary with operating conditions, but it is recom-
mended to maintain a fairly consistent temperature differential across the engine. Large tem-
perature differentials across the engine can cause cyclical temperature changes, or even
thermal shock the engine if extremely cold coolant suddenly enters the engine which can
cause engine damage.

Typical coolant temperatures:

Jacket Water inlet: 160-165°F (71°C – 74°C)


Jacket Water outlet: 180°F (82°C) (thermostatically controlled outlet temperature)
Auxiliary water inlet: 130°F (54°C) (thermostatically controlled inlet temperature)
Auxiliary water outlet: 145°F – 150°F (63°C – 66°C)

COOLING SYSTEM PIPING


Cooling system piping must be sized to allow the coolant to flow without excessive restric-
tion. The piping material must be suitable for the temperatures and pressures encountered,
as well as vibration from the operating engine. Flexible connections are recommended at
all connection points to the engine. This will isolate the engine and piping components from
high stresses due to vibration. Engines mounted on spring isolators or other soft mounting
systems must have cooling system connections with flexibility sufficient to handle the motion
normally encountered. Flexible connections for the Jacket and Auxiliary water circuit inlet
and outlet connections are to be provided by the packager. Cooling system piping must also
be properly aligned and supported on the package to not exert any external forces on the
engine connections. Flexible connections are not designed to accommodate for misaligned
piping.

9 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Cooling System Chapter 9
Dresser and Flexmaster couplings have the ability to join pipes which are not closely aligned.
These couplings flex to join the pipes. However, they become very stiff when clamped in place.
Waukesha does not consider these as flexible couplings for isolating components from ex-
cessive vibration.

Piping restriction depends on the pipe diameter, pipe length, number of elbows and transi-
tions, and the piping material used. A procedure for calculating the cooling system piping
restriction is available in Appendix A in this manual. This procedure uses the EDL (Equivalent
Duct Length) Method, however there are other methods or computer based simulations that
may also be used.

CIRCUIT EXTERNAL RESTRICTION, BOOSTER PUMP


If the external restriction of the cooling system is too high, an additional cooling system
booster pump is required to ensure adequate flow through the cooling system. The two pump
system, illustrated in “Figure 9-1: Two pump system”, is used in circuits where the engine
water pump has insufficient capacity to flow coolant through the engine and heat recovery
components. A system water pump is installed downstream of the engine thermostat, and a
common pipe must be installed between the inlet of both the system pump and the engine
pump. The common pipe is used to equalize the pressure at the inlet of both pumps and the
static pressure line is installed at the common pipe. The system pump is sized to deliver the
required flow through all cooling components other than the engine. The engine water pump
needs to overcome restriction of the engine, the thermostat, and the common pipe.

Exhaust heat
Expansion tank exchanger
Custom heat
exchanger

Engine T-stat Excess heat


dump radiator
System
WP
System
Common
Engine T-stat
pipe

Engine WP

Figure 9-1: Two pump system

9 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 9 Cooling System
EXPANSION TANK
Each cooling circuit requires an expansion tank sized for the desired coolant makeup volume
plus an additional air space equal to 11% of total cooling system volume. The air space will al-
low for coolant expansion as it heats up and allows air to compress and increase the coolant
system pressure. A 7 psig (0.48 bar) pressure cap should also be included. The expansion tank
should be mounted at the highest point in the system, and high enough to provide at least 2
psig (4.6 feet) static head pressure to the inlet of the engine mounted pumps. The expansion
tank provides the function of de-aerating the coolant , controlling cooling system pressures,
allows for coolant expansion, and provides coolant reserve. An expansion tank is a single
chamber tank located at the highest point in the cooling system. Vent lines are connected
from high points in the cooling system to the expansion tank below the water line. These vent
lines allow trapped air to escape to the ex- pansion tank where the air bubbles out of solution,
thus de-aerating the coolant (see “Figure 9-2: Cooling system schematic”).

Expansion tank

Vent line

Trapped Air

Static line
Engine Component

Cooling
component

Figure 9-2: Cooling system schematic

Vent lines should be 1/4” in diameter on systems with vent lines less than 10 feet (3 meters)
long, or 1/2” diameter with a 1/4” orifice on systems with vent lines more than 10 feet (3 m)
long.

Vent lines on the VHP engines should be connected to the high points on the engine for
the circuit. For the Jacket Water circuit, the vent line should be connected to the two water
manifold pipes on the top of the engine and is shown on the general engine outline drawing
available on www.ge-distributedpower.com. The auxiliary water circuit vent connections are
in the piping to the oil cooler, and at the top of the intercooler near the front side of the engine.

All vent lines must have flex connections, or other provisions, to prevent stress on the lines
due to engine vibration. The vent lines must also be properly supported so their weight is not
being supported by the flexible connection. Failure to properly relieve these stresses may re-
sult in a broken vent line which could cause a glycol fire. Each circuit may have multiple vent
lines and they may be combined into one common vent line. Vent lines between the individual
jacket and auxiliary water circuits may not be combined.

Automatic degassing systems or automatic bleeders are not recommended by Waukesha.


Also bladder pressurization systems are not preferred as they can be difficult to maintain
constant pressure, and they do not provide a reservoir for additional coolant if a leak were
to occur.

9 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Cooling System Chapter 9

Auxiliary
Jacket water vent
circuit vent line
line connections
connections
0.375” NPT
0.25” NPT

Figure 9-3: Vent line connections

A static line from the bottom of the expansion tank to the water pump inlet controls the pump
inlet pressure. The static inlet pressure must be between 2 - 21 psig (0.2 – 1.4 barg), or 4.6 – 50
feet (1.4 – 15.2 m) of H2O.

JACKET WATER STATIC INLET CONNECTION


The static pressure line should be connected as close as possible to the inlet of the Jacket
Water pump.

12-Cylinder JW Static Line Connection

There is a 1.25” NPT connection on the water pump inlet, this is the ideal location for a static
line. There are other water inlet options available on this engine and may provide an addi-
tional static line location. If a static line connection is installed in the customer piping it must
be right at the inlet connection to the engine.

16-Cylinder JW Static Line Connection

The static line from the expansion tank should be connected to the 1” – 11.5 NPTF connection
on the engine mounted water inlet manifold; this is connection 70 on the outline drawing.

AUXILIARY WATER STATIC INLET CONNECTION


12-Cylinder Aux Static Line Connection

The static pressure line should be connected at the inlet of the Auxiliary Water pump in the
piping between the pump and thermostat as shown in “Figure 9-4: Auxiliary Water static inlet
connection with Waukesha thermostat”.

9 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 9 Cooling System

Auxiliary Water static inlet


connection with Waukesha
supplied thermostat. 0.75” NPT

Figure 9-4: Auxiliary Water static inlet connection with Waukesha thermostat

16-Cylinder Aux Static Line Connection

The static line should be connected to the 1” -11.5 NPT fitting at the inlet of the auxiliary water
pump.

VENT LINE CONNECTIONS


Vent lines are required to be installed at the high points in the cooling system. These vent lines
allow trapped air in the cooling system to be vented up to the expansion tank. The vent lines
should slope continuously upwards, so they do not create another air trap, and enter the ex-
pansion tank below the level of the coolant and away from the static line locations. Vent lines
should be 1/4” in diameter on systems with vent lines less than 10 feet (3 meters) long, or 1/2”
diameter with a 1/4” orifice on systems with vent lines more than 10 feet (3 m) long. Multiple
vent lines can be combined provided they use a 1/4” orifice and combine into a 1/2” line.

All vent lines must have flex connections, or other provisions, to prevent stress on the lines
due to engine vibration. The vent lines must also be properly supported so their weight is not
being supported by the flexible connection. Failure to properly relieve these stresses may
result in a broken vent line which could cause a glycol fire.

12-Cylinder Vent Lines

The 12-Cylinder engines have the following venting locations (see outline drawing for further
detail):

Jacket water circuit:

• JW air bleed – 0.375”-18 NPT (2 places)

Auxiliary water circuit:

• Top intercooler piping – 0.25”-18 NPT (2 places)

16-Cylinder Vent Lines

The 16-cylinder engine has a special requirement for the turbocharger vent lines. These vent
lines cannot be combined with other lines and must be 3/8” (9.5mm), they must run directly

9 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Cooling System Chapter 9

to the expansion tank.

Jacket water circuit:

• Turbocharger – 0.375”-18 NPT (2 places)

• JW air bleed (top of JW thermostat housing adapter) – 0.375”-18 NPT (1 place)

Auxiliary water circuit:

• Top intercooler piping – 0.25”-18 NPT (2 places)

COMPRESSOR COOLING CIRCUIT


It is common to use the engine auxiliary water circuit to also cool the compressor oil cooler
and compressor packing. A provision on the engine has been provided to obtain some of the
coolant immediately after the auxiliary water pump at the low temperature of 130°F (54°C)
to be used for cooling the compressor. The compressor coolant is then returned to the circuit
at the outlet of the engine. When designing a compressor cooling circuit the pump capacity
must be considered since using some of the coolant for the compressor reduces the allow-
able external restriction or pressure drop. If the system restriction exceeds the pump capac-
ity, the system must be redesigned to reduce the restriction, such as larger diameter piping
or fewer elbows, or an additional booster pump must be installed to increase the capacity of
the circuit.

WATER HEATER
Starting an engine in cold conditions may require preheating of cooling and lubrication cir-
cuits. Waukesha requires jacket water and lube oil preheating for starting in temperatures
below 50°F (10°C). Heaters should be sized to maintain 70°F (21°C) in these conditions. Once
started, the engine should be allowed to warm up under a light load until water and oil tem-
peratures exceed 100°F (38°C). Emergency standby engines which are required to start and
accept load immediately must be preheated to 100°F (38°C) to 120°F (49°C). The size of the
jacket water heater will depend on the ambient temperature, and the heater supplier should
be consulted for sizing.

12-Cylinder JW Heater Connections

The jacket water heater inlet connections to the engine typically will use the water drains on
each side of the crankcase. A tee can be installed to still allow draining of the coolant from
the engine. Since the cooling system on the engine is split between the two banks, the water
heater inlet will need to be connected to both sides of the crankcase for effective heating. The
water heater outlet connection can be in the water manifold on the top of the engine. The
other option is to not use the top connection and just use two side drains, however they must
be on opposite sides and ends (diagonally) from each other (connections C on the outline
drawing)

9 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 9 Cooling System

Jacket Water heater


inlet connections
(2 available per side)
0.75 inch NPT

Figure 9-5: 12-Cylinder water heater outlet connection

Jacket Water
heater outlet
connections
(only 1 needed)
0.75 inch NPT

Figure 9-6: 12-Cylinder water heater inlet connection

9 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Cooling System Chapter 9
16-Cylinder JW Heater Connections

Similar to the 12-cylinder, the 16-cylinder requires two heater inlet connections (1 on each
side at the rear of the engine) and an outlet connection at the top of the engine by the coolant
outlet. This connection must be done on the top manifold before the thermostat (see “Figure
9-7: 16-Cylinder water heater connections” on page 9).

Outlet from
engine -
0.75” NPT

Inlet from Jacket Water Heater


- 0.75” NPT - 2 locations
(1 each side)

Figure 9-7: 16-Cylinder water heater connections

ENGINE THERMAL SHOCK AT SHUTDOWN DUE TO THERMOSIPHONING


Thermosiphoning is a process where coolant will circulate in a cooling loop without any as-
sistance from a water pump. As coolant is heated, its density decreases, causing it to rise. As
the coolant is cooled, it drops below warmer coolant. These actions create flow in a circuit.
A greater difference between engine coolant temperature and radiator coolant temperature
will cause a greater flow. A radiator at a higher elevation than the engine will have a greater
thermosiphoning flow than one mounted in front of the engine. Thermosiphoning can cause
engine damage due to thermal shock when a hot engine is shutdown and effective cooling
of the engine stops. There are several methods to design the cooling system to prevent ther-
mosiphoning which are detailed in Application Note app9_92 in Technical Data on www.
ge-distributedpower.com.

Restarting shortly after shutdown should be avoided. Restart-


ing can cause a cold slug of coolant from the radiator to enter
the engine because the thermostat may still be fully opened.

9 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 9 Cooling System
FAN DRIVE
The VHP engines are available with an optional stub shaft or pulley typically used for driving
the cooler fan. In a direct drive application, a drive shaft directly coupled to the front stub shaft
is used to drive the cooler fan. The drive shaft must be properly supported with a minimum
of 2 bearing jackshafts, and a coupling must be used between the engine stub shaft and the
drive shaft. No side loads should be applied to engine stub shaft when used in a direct drive
application. A torsional analysis should also be performed to analyze the front drive system.

Power can also be transmitted from the engine front stub shaft or pulley with a belt drive
application. In a pulley arrangement, a side load is applied to a front stub shaft which adds
additional downward forces on the front crankshaft main bearing. If the forces on the front
stub shaft are high, the front main bearing may experience premature wear and cause en-
gine failure. Limitations for the maximum load applied are listed in the technical data sheet
(S-4052-13) for the VHP engines.

12-Cylinder Front Drive

• Maximum front drive power with downward force: 61 BHP (45 kWb)

• Maximum front drive power with upward force: 95 BHP (71 kWb)

16-Cylinder Front Drive

The 16 cylinder engine uses an outboard bearing to support the stub shaft and pulley at the
front of the engine. This must be installed and aligned by the packager; detailed instructions
are listed on S-7232-437. This setup has a maximum limit of 150 Hp at 1200 rpm.

MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
After installation of the engine and cooling system piping, the piping should be cleaned be-
fore commissioning the engine. It is recommended to use a coarse screen or filter to capture
any installation debris from the system.

Coolant for the engine is filled from the bottom of the engine to the top which allows air in the
system to escape through the vent lines. When filling the engine, any component with a vent
should be opened during the initial fill until coolant reaches that level of the engine during
filling.

Periodically the coolant in the engine will need to be replaced (as needed by analysis or onsite
maintenance schedule). Drain locations on the engine (as indicated on the engine outline
drawing) should be easily accessible.

9 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10

CHAPTER 10 - LUBRICATION SYSTEM


SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Lube Oil Recommendations

• The lube oil chosen to run in the engine must be classified to be run in natural gas engines.

• The oil must meet Waukesha lube oil requirements for the particular engine as listed in
latest edition of S1015-30 or SB 12-1880.

• A lube oil analysis should be set-up for the engine.

• Engine requires SAE 40 oil with a minimum of 0.45% sulfated ash by weight with both
metallic and ashless additive systems. A maximum of 0.50% sulfated ash is allowed when
using an emPact emissions control system.

• A maximum of 0.10% zinc is recommended.

Engine Pre/Post Lubrication System

• Prelube system has been set to run for a minimum of the following times:

–– 12-Cylinder, DC or air/gas - 30 seconds

–– 12-Cylinder, AC motor - 3 minutes

–– 16-Cylinder - 2 minutes

• An automatic post lube system set to run after the gas valve has closed:

–– 12-Cylinder - 60 seconds minimum

–– 16-Cylinder - 10 minutes (to extend the turbo life)

• Solenoid valve exhausts piped to safe location if combustible gas is used.

Engine Oil Heaters

• Lube oil heaters must be used if the engine will be operating at ambient temperatures
below 50° F (10° C).

Note: If an electric prelube pump is used oil heaters are required below 65° F (18.3° C).

• For a standby application in which the engine is required to pull load immediately upon
start-up, the oil must be heated to a minimum of 100° F (38° C).

• Use a circulating type heater that circulates the oil in the engine sump. Refer to heater
manufacturer for sizing requirements based on site conditions and engine size.

Angular Operating Limits

• Ensure the angular operating limits are within the defined limits for the engine model be-
ing used to assure constant supply of oil to the oil pick up screen.

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
The lubrication system consists of the following components:

• Oil pan and suction line

10 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System

• Gear driven, externally mounted oil pump

• Adjustable pressure regulating valve

• Oil pump relief valve

• Full-flow oil filters

• Centrifugal oil bypass filtration

• Filter relief valves

• Lube oil temperature control valves

• Engine mounted, tube and baffle oil cooler

• Engine mounted pre-lube pump and inline lubricator

• Pilot operated prelube valve

• External piping

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard Engine

Option code 5005 (12-cylinder only) is for the base style oil pan. This replaces the deep sump
oil pan and reduces the oil capacity to 90 gal. (340L) and includes pan, filters, cooler and vol-
ume vessel. The lube oil volume vessel is shipped loose. With this option code the single fuel
inlet is not available with this option code. This option is typically only ordered when replacing
an old VHP engine so that the existing base can be used again.

Option code 5022 (12-cylinder) and 5022B (16-cylinder) supplies the engine with a mounted,
Kenco LCE oil level regulator.

Waukesha offers the following option codes to supply electric prelube pump motors:

12-Cylinder Electric Options:

• 5229B - 115V AC, 60Hz, single phase

• 5229D – 208-230V AC, 50/60 Hz, single phase

• 5229E – 24V DC

16-Cylinder Electric Options:

• 5229F - Dual voltage, 110/220 V AC 50 Hz, or 115/208-230V AC 60Hz, single phase

Option code 5235 for the 12-cylinder models will provide only the prelube pump and allow
the customer to supply their own electric motor. The pump rotation is clockwise looking at
the motor end of the pump. The motor must meet the following: frame size NEMA 56C, ¾ hp,
950-1200 rpm.

GC-Spec

The Gas Compression (GC) Spec uses the air/gas prelube motor and does not have an option
to remove or change this.

10 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
If option code 5235 is selected, customer must supply a motor to operate the prelube pump.
The pump accepts common air or electric motor drives with a NEMA 56C frame ,¾ hp, 950-
1200 rpm operation, and needs to be properly supported by the customer.

The supply air/gas is required to be delivered at 70-150psi (482 - 1030 kPa) when the Wauke-
sha air/gas motor is used. If the air/gas starter is installed on the engine then the air/gas
supply for the pre/postlube is routed from the starter inlet from the factory.

Customer must supply final air/gas piping for pre/postlube system for the motor exhaust. If
combustible gas is used and the engine is installed in a hazardous area the solenoid valve
exhausts must also be piped to a safe location per local codes.

Customer must supply a lube oil heater, if required, which heats and circulates the oil in the
sump. Refer to heater manufacturer for sizing requirements based on site conditions and
engine size.

Customer to supply a lube oil level regulator (if option code 5022/5022B is not selected) and
oil make up tank, if desired. If Waukesha option code 5022/5022B is ordered the customer
supplied make up tank must be at least 2’ (0.6 m), and a maximum of 25’ (7.6 m), above the
inlet to the Kenco controller. The oil lines must be steel and should be ½” I.D., the controller
has a ½” NPT connection. A flexible connection must be used to isolate the oil makeup piping
from engine virbations. A fire safe valve should be installed in the oil line as close to the con-
troller as possible; this is included with option code 5022/5022B.

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
S-1015-30 Lube Oil Recommendations

S-3549-J Allowable Engine Angles

S-7382-56 Prelube & Postlube Requirements

S-7521-4 VHP 12-cylinder, GSI Oil Pump Performance

L-08041-302 VHP 12-cylinder Lube Oil Level Regulator, code 5022, Outline Drawing

L-08049-118 VHP 16-cylinder Lube Oil Level Regulator, code 5022B, Outline Drawing

S-05613-309 Lube Oil Level Regulator, code 5022, Piping Schematic

FORM 6319-2 VHP 12-cylinder Series 4 with ESM & Extender O&M

FORM 6398-1 VHP Series Four P9394GSI with AFR2 O&M

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
By circulating properly selected oil throughout the engine, the lubrication system performs
three main functions: lubrication, cooling and cleaning.

Lubrication systems provide a cushion of oil preventing direct metal to metal contact be-
tween engine components. Without a properly functioning lubrication system, moving metal
surfaces would come into direct contact with each other. This will create wear and heat,
leading to engine failure. If oil does not reach the cylinder sleeves and rings, piston and piston
ring scuffing will occur, leading to a loss of ring seal. Excessive blow-by and decreased power
would result, ultimately leading to engine seizure/failure.

10 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System
Oil absorbs heat as it flows through the engine. The combustion chamber is cooled by the
jacket water in the cylinder head and around the sleeve and by lube oil on the piston. The
heat is then transferred from the lube oil to the auxiliary or jacket water system by the lube
oil cooler.

The lube oil contains many additives which enhance specific performance characteristics.
Among these additives are dispersants and detergents which suspend dirt and water parti-
cles in the oil allowing for removal by the oil filter system. This cleansing action is important
for component longevity.

OIL SUMP AND SUCTION LINE (PICKUP/SUPPLY)


The bottom of the crankcase is enclosed by an oil sump of cast steel. Perforated plates sep-
arate the oil sump from the crankcase to prevent foreign matter from getting into the lubri-
cant. A suction pipe draws the oil from the lowest point in the sump.

Sump capacity including filters and coolers:

• 190 gal (719L) for the VHP 12-cylinder with deep sump oil pan

• 90 gal (340L) for the VHP 12-cylinder with shallow sump oil pan (option code 5005)

• 259 gal (980L) for the VHP 16-cylinder with deep sump oil pan

OIL PUMP
The gear-driven oil pump is externally mounted. On VHP 12-cylinder Series Four engines,
the oil pump is located on the front of the engine, below the crankshaft. On VHP 16-cylinder
Series Four engines, the oil pump is located on the rear gear train. This oil pump contains an
integral spool-type pressure relief valve and an adjustable oil pressure regulating valve that
will maintain oil pressure regardless of engine speed or oil temperature.

PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE


The pressure regulating valve is used to maintain the engine oil pressure within the proper
operating range. The valve is located in the front gear housing (see “Figure 10-1: 12-cylinder
front gear housing - pressure regulating valve”) and is preset at the factory. When the engine
is at operating temperature there should be 50-60 psi (345 – 415 kPa) in the oil header.

Figure 10-1: 12-cylinder front gear housing - pressure regulating valve

FULL-FLOW OIL FILTERS


The VHP engines use an oil filter system consisting of five replaceable filter cartridges mount-
ed to a filter housing located on the front end of the engine for the 12-cylinder models, and
rear of the engine for the 16-cylinder. The oil filters are full-flow type. Each filter cartridge
contains a bypass valve that prevents the loss of oil circulation due to a dirty filter.

10 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10
The sight glass allows for inspection to ensure that the filters and base have been drained
during filter changes (see “Figure 10-2: 12-cylinder Oil filters and housing”).

Filter
cartridges

Sight glass

Figure 10-2: 12-cylinder Oil filters and housing

OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE


The oil inlet temperature as measured at the oil header typically is 172F (78C) (see “Table
10-1: Oil inlet temperature” and “Table 10-2: Oil inlet pressure”). The thermostatic valves are
enclosed in the oil filter base on the 12-cylinder, and in the oil cooler base on the 16-cylinder.

Table 10-1: Oil inlet temperature

OIL INLET TEMPERATURE AT THE OIL HEADER


Normal Alarm Shutdown
180°F (82°C) 195°F (91°C) 205°F (96°C)

Table 10-2: Oil inlet pressure

OIL HEADER PRESSURE


Normal Alarm Shutdown
50 - 60 psi 35 psi 30 psi
(345 - 415 kPa) (241 kPa) (207 kPa)

OIL COOLER
The 12-cylinder oil cooler (see “Figure 10-3: 12-cylinder oil cooler”) is a tube and baffle type
assembly. The auxiliary water pump circulates coolant through the oil cooler tube bundle.
The oil circulates around the tube bundle. Heat from the oil passes through the tubes to the
coolant, which then carries it to a heat transfer device for dissipation.

Oil cooler

Figure 10-3: 12-cylinder oil cooler

The oil cooler on the 16-cylinder is a plate type assembly. The oil and coolant flow in opposite
directions between alternating plates.

10 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System
CENTRIFUGE CLEANABLE OIL FILTERING SYSTEM
The centrifuge oil filtering system consists of a centrifuge, using a removable paper insert (see
“Figure 10-4: Microspin centrifuge assembly”). The centrifuge is installed as a bypass system,
working in conjunction with the full-flow filter. The centrifuge is driven by the engine’s oil
pressure. The spinning action of the centrifuge’s internal turbine assembly develops a force
that exceeds 2,000 Gs, which compacts the contaminants against the turbine’s housing. The
centrifuge will remove oil-contaminating particles as small as 0.5 microns. The full-flow filter
elements remove remaining particles as small as 25 microns absolute.

Figure 10-4: Microspin centrifuge assembly

ALLOWABLE ENGINE ANGLE LIMITS


Angular operating limits must be complied with to assure a constant supply of oil to the oil
pump pickup screen. Due to its fluid nature, oil in the sump always flows to the lowest possi-
ble point. If the engine is not level, it is possible that the oil pickup screen/tube would not be
able to pick up the lubricant.

Figure 10-5: Angular measurement locale

This would mean a loss of lubrication at the bearings and other vital engine parts. Wauke-
sha strongly recommends mounting the engine on a level surface. However, Waukesha has
established permissible angles at which the engine can operate without loss of oil to the oil
pickup screen (see “Table 10-3: Engine angular limits”).

10 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10

Table 10-3: Engine angular limits

FRONT DOWN REAR DOWN LEFT DOWN RIGHT DOWN


MODEL DEGREES DEGREES DEGREES DEGREES
VHP 12 & 16 Cylinder 2 2 7 7

1. Tabulated angle operation values are based on unidirectional tilt. For bi-directional tilt or
allowable intermittent tilt consult Waukesha’s Application Engineering Department.

2. Left and right are as viewed when facing the flywheel.

3. These values represent bare engine with oil leveler mounted in standard location.

LUBE OIL HEATER


Lube oil heaters are required for engines operating at ambient temperatures below 50° F (10°
C), but if an electric prelube pump is used oil heaters are required below 65° F (18.3° C). Oil
must be heated to ensure proper oil flow to ease startability and load application. For engines
required to pull load immediately upon startup (standby applications), the oil should be heat-
ed to a minimum of 100° F (38° C). For engines that operate continuously other than planned
service shutdowns, the oil should be heated to 70 – 100° F (21 – 38° C). Cold oil will not flow
through the cooler and filter and still provide adequate supply pressure to the engine.

Waukesha requires circulating type oil heaters to be used. This prevents the burning or oil
coking that can occur with immersion style heaters.

When piping for engine oil pre/post lubrication and oil heating, refer to the installation draw-
ing for connection points and sizes. Oil is drawn directly from the engine oil sump drain, and
piped to the inlet of the pump/heater. From the heater, the oil flow should be piped back to
the engine oil sump.

Size the system following the heater manufacturer’s recommendations based on system vol-
ume and ambient conditions.

PRELUBE PUMP/MOTOR
The function of the prelube pump/motor is to purge the lubrication system of air and to en-
sure that all moving parts are properly lubricated before the engine is started (see “Figure
10-6: Prelube motor/pump assembly (12-cylinder)” for the standard air/gas configuration). It
is also used to ensure that sufficient heat is removed from the engine after shutdown.

Prelube
Prelube motor
pump

Figure 10-6: Prelube motor/pump assembly (12-cylinder)

10 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System
The standard Waukesha air/gas prelube system will be controlled by the ESM system and
wired from the factory. If combustible gas is used and the engine is installed in a hazardous
area the solenoid valve exhausts must also be piped to a safe location per local codes.

Prelube
valve

Mounting
bracket

Figure 10-7: Prelube valve mounting bracket (12-cylinder)

PRELUBRICATION
Engine prelube extends engine life by filling the lube oil cooler and filter prior to the engine
starting. This prevents the engine from being starved from the lack of lubricating oil upon
immediate startup. Engine prelube also purges the lubrication system of air and ensures all
moving parts subjected to friction are properly lubricated before the engine is started.

Prelubing is required on all VHP engine models. For continuous duty applications, the engine
should run the prelube prior to each start. See the table below for prelube time, pressure, and
flow rate. For standby applications, the engine should prelube for 15 seconds every hour to
ensure the engine will be ready when it is required to start.

Pressures may drop in half with hot oil, flow is the determining factor.

The engine prelube is controlled by the ESM. The duration can be changed in the Prelube Time
field located on the [F3] Start-Stop panel in ESP.

Prelube specifications

ENGINE MODEL PRELUBE TIME PRESSURE (IN OIL FLOW


DURATION HEADER) RATE
VHP 12-cylinder 120 seconds 1 - 4.5 psi1 7 gpm1
before starting (7 - 31 kPa ) (26 lpm)
VHP 16-cylinder 120 seconds 13 psi2 30 gpm2
before starting (90 kPa ) (26 lpm)

1. Based on 50°F oil


2. Based on 900 rpm pump speed

10 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10
Table 10-4: Standard air/gas prelube motor specifications

ENGINE MODEL AIR PRESSURE MAX POWER AIR CONSUMPTION


VHP 12-cylinder 70- 150 psig 1.9 hp 75 SCFM
(482 - 1030 kPa) (1.4 kW) (127 m3/hr)
VHP 16-cylinder 70- 150 psig 4.15 hp 181 SCFM
(482 - 1030 kPa) (3.1 kW) (307.5 m3/hr)

Excessive postlube may flood turbochargers.

POSTLUBRICATION
Waukesha recommends post lubrication for all VHP models. Post lubrication ensures that
sufficient heat is removed from the engine after shutdown by providing cooling to the turbo-
charger bearings and preventing carbon coking of the oil which extends turbocharger life.
Post lube should be performed automatically upon main gas valve closure for 2 to 5 minutes
(12-cylinder) or 10 minutes (16-cylinder) after every engine shutdown. Excessive postlube
may flood turbocharger.

There must be NO postlube with any engine emergency shutdown.

LUBE OIL LEVEL REGULATOR


It is highly recommended to add a lube oil level regulator to the engine package if the option
code for Waukesha to supply one is not ordered. Lube oil level controllers are designed to
maintain the running oil level in the crankcase of stationary engines. The oil controller works
in conjunction with an overhead oil supply system which feeds the oil level controller. As the
oil is consumed, the oil controller supplies the required amount of oil to maintain a proper
level in the crankcase. The oil controller maintains the proper amount of oil in the crankcase
using a float controlled valve. The valve opens and closes as oil is needed in the crankcase to
provide a constant oil level. There are optional oil level switches that can be added to trip an
alarm if the oil level is too high or too low.

The oil level controller can be mounted onto the engine oil pan or skid, and has a sight glass
to visually show engine lube oil level. For engine oil level, reference Oil Level section below.

The Waukesha supplied (option code 5022) lube oil regulator comes mounted on the oil pan
and replaces one of the oil pan doors. The customer supplied make up tank must be at least
2’ (0.6 m), and a maximum of 25’ (7.6 m), above the inlet to the Kenco controller. The oil lines
must be steel and should be ½” I.D.; the controller has a ½” NPT connection. The shipped
loose fire safe valve should be installed in the oil line as close to the controller as possible.

When regulators are customer-supplied, it is important to follow the regulator manufactur-


er’s installation instructions. This includes properly routing a vent line to the crankcase (above
the oil level) to reference the correct pressure. The vent line should have a continuous down-
ward pitch, and be sized per the manufacturer’s recommendations (e.g. for the Waukesha
supplied models, minimum size is 3/8” I.D.). Additionally, for VHP engines, oil level regulators
should be installed on the left side of the engine. For the VHP 12 cylinder models, the recom-
mendation is to install on the crankcase door, left side, 3rd door from the rear. For the P9394,
the recommended location is on the right side, 4th door from the rear. Due to effects of rota-
tion of the crankshaft within the crankcase, installing a regulator in different locations could
result in issues maintaining the proper oil level.

10 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System

Vent to
crankcase

Oil inlet Electrical


switch
connection

Figure 10-8: Optional Waukesha supplied oil level regulator

TYPICAL OIL CONSUMPTION


The typical lube oil consumption, at full load and 1200rpm, for a new VHP engine is around
0.0005 lb/bhp-hr (0.304 g/kW-hr). For engines running at full load see “Table 10-5: VHP Oil
Consumption”:

Table 10-5: VHP Oil Consumption

Power Oil Consumption


ENGINE MODEL
(hp) (kW) (gal/day (L.day)
L5794GSI 1380 1029 2.27 8.57
L7042GSI S4 1480 1104 2.43 9.20
L7044GSI 1680 1253 2.76 10.44
P9394GSI 2250 1678 3.70 13.98

Est. Oil Consumption (gal) = 0.0007(lb/bhp-hr) x Power(bhp) x Time(hr) / 7.3(lb/gal).

Oil consumption will vary depending on site conditions, engine load, engine speed, and the
age of the engine. Excessive oil consumption is a sign that the engine may need service.
When sizing an oil makeup tank double the values above to plan for oil consumption increase
as the engine ages.

MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS

OIL CHANGE

Hot oil can cause severe burns. Allow oil to cool prior to working
an oil system components. Wear protective equipment and use
caution while working on oil system components.

10 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10

Always consider the weight of the item being lifted and use only
properly rated lifting equipment and approved lifting methods.

Allow the engine to cool to room temperature before cleaning,


servicing or repairing the unit.

Always stop the unit before cleaning, servicing or repairing the


unit or any driven equipment.

Always place all controls in the OFF position and disconnect or


lock out starters to prevent accidental restarting. If possible, lock
all controls in the OFF position and take the key. Put a sign on the
control panel warning that the unit is being serviced.

Always close all manual control valves, and disconnect and lock
out all energy sources to the unit, including all fuel, electric, hy-
draulic, and pneumatic connections.

Always disconnect or lock out driven euipment to prevent the pos-


sibilty of the driven equipment rotating the disabled engine.

Do not put the filter or cooler near the exhaust outlet or


other places where the temperature could become exces-
sively warm. Excessive heat will speed oil deterioration. It
will also create a fire hazard in the event in the event of an oil spill or line rupture.

Change the oil, including the oil filters, every 3,000 running hours or as determined by oil anal-
ysis. Oil change intervals should never be extended beyond this recommendation because of
additive depletion and changes in the physical properties of the oil. A sample of the used oil
should be submitted for analysis after every 500 running hours at first , then can potentially
be extended based on the analysis results.

When operating on a fuel that contains hydrogen sulfide (H2S), the oil should be changed
every 500 hours or sooner as determined by the lube oil analysis. Samples should be taken
every 100 hours to ensure the oil is within the condemning limits given in S-1015-30.

Based on environmental and engine operating conditions, the lubrication oil may require
changes that are much more frequent than those recommended by Waukesha. Many vari-
ables are involved in determining the proper time between oil changes. The oil type, the se-
verity of the environment and the internal condition of the engine are only a few of many
variables that have a direct effect on the frequency at which the oil must be changed.

Using an incorrect oil or extending the time between oil changes may cause varnish deposits,
oil oxidation/nitration, sludge or any number of problems to appear.

The paragraphs below highlight the basic procedure for completing an oil change. More de-
tailed instructions can be found in the VHP Series 4 O&M, FORM 6319-2

10 - 11 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System
OIL FILL – INITIAL PROCEDURE

Fill the engine oil through the filler pipe located at the lower rear left side of the engine (see
“Figure 10-9: Oil fill location”). Add oil until the level reaches the FULL mark on the dipstick.
Then, run the prelube pump to fill the oil lines, cooler and filters. Recheck the oil level and fill
until the oil level is back at the FULL mark. Install oil filler cap, start engine and allow oil to
warmup to its normal operating temperature. Shut engine down and allow oil to drain back
into pan. Check the dipstick and add oil to oil pan until level returns to FULL mark.

Figure 10-9: Oil fill location

OIL DRAIN

NOTE: Drain oil warm for best results

Oil Cooler: Remove the drain plug at bottom of oil cooler shell midway between inlet and rear
bonnets. Install drain plug after oil has drained. Open the drain petcocks in oil cooler tubing.
Close the petcocks after oil has drained.

Oil Filters: Open drain valve under filter housing to allow oil to drain back into the oil pan. Use
sight glass in filter base to verify that the filter base has drained. Remove filter elements from
housing.

Oil Pan: Remove 2 in. square-head drain plug. For convenience, two drain plugs are provided,
one at each end of the oil pan. Retain an oil sample for oil analysis. Install drain plugs after
oil has drained. Installation of a customer-supplied ball valve and pump facilitates draining
of the oil pan.

10 - 12 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Lubrication System Chapter 10
The level of the oil in the crankcase should be checked each day while the engine is running
and should always maintain the oil level at the upper notch. Since there is no static line on the
dipstick, it does not indicate where the level of the oil in the sump should be when the engine
is shut down. The difference between “Full” mark and “Low” mark on the oil pan dipstick, for
VHP 12 cylinder deep sump oil pan is 22 gallons.

Whenever the oil level is checked, carefully examine the condition of the oil on the dipstick.
Replace the oil any time it appears diluted, thickened by sludge or otherwise deteriorated.

OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT


NOTE: Before adjusting the oil pressure, always check the condition of the oil filters and replace
if necessary. A dirty filter will cause the engine oil pressure to drop.

The pressure regulating valve is adjusted on the outside of the engine through the use of an
adjustment screw (see “Figure 10-10: Oil pressure control valve on 12-cylinder models” and
“Figure 10-11: Oil pressure control valve on 16-cylinder models”). Before adjustment of the oil
pressure, the oil temperature must be at normal operating temperature with the engine oper-
ating at rated speed. Adjust the oil pressure to maintain 55 psi (380 kPa) at the maximum rat-
ed speed. Turn the screw in to increase the oil pressure and out to decrease the oil pressure.

Pressure
regulating
valve

Figure 10-10: Oil pressure control valve on 12-cylinder models

Pressure
regulating
valve

Figure 10-11: Oil pressure control valve on 16-cylinder models

10 - 13 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 10 Lubrication System
OIL SAMPLING
An oil sampling port is located under the oil filter base on the 12 and 16-cylinder engines. This
is provided to allow lube oil samples to be easily taken for regular oil analyses.

Figure 10-12: Oil Sampling Port - Bottom of oil filter base

10 - 14 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Crankcase Breather System Chapter 11

CHAPTER 11 - CRANKCASE BREATHER SYSTEM


CRANKCASE BREATHER SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the crankcase breather system is to maintain a slight negative pressure in the
crankcase. The negative pressure rids the crankcase of harmful water vapors and combus-
tion gases, and helps to prevent sludge buildup and oil contamination. Maintaining a nega-
tive crankcase pressure is important to prevent oil leaks and vacate harmful vapors, but too
much vacuum pulls in environmental dust and dirt. Vacuum lines from both turbocharger
compressors create the draw past engine seals that pulls the gases from the crankcase. The
gases go through a pre-separator and main (coalescing) separator to remove oil vapor from
the gases prior to being drawn into the engine. The separated oil is returned to the crankcase
through a return tube which contains a one-way check valve that prevents backflow of oil
and/or vapor back into the separator. The crankcase pressure is regulated by the pressure
regulator valve so the specified negative pressure in the crankcase is maintained. The crank-
case breather system has the following benefits:

• Reduction of oil blow-by with use of new breather separator assembly

• Connection of breather system to both turbocharger banks reduces risk of coking the
turbo and intake system

• Maintains crankcase vacuum across speed/load changes for improved sealing

• Extended service intervals (estimated at 8,000 hours depending on operating conditions)

NOTE: This breather system is not available on engines using a low pressure (draw-thru) fuel
system.

The crankcase breather system consists of the following components:

• Breather pre-separator

• Crankcase pressure regulator valve

• Breather separator assembly

−− 12- Cylinder: Qty 1


−− 16- Cylinder: Qty 2 (second separator was added, in parallel, for builds after second
quarter of 2016)

• Breather check valve

• Breather insulation blanket

• Breather system tubing

BREATHER PRE-SEPARATOR
The breather pre-separator is located on the crankcase at the inlet breather tube connection.

The pre-separator allows vapors to be vented from the crankcase. It also serves to stop a
portion of the oil carried by these vapors from reaching the oil separator. As the oil mist and
vapors pass out of the crankcase, the expanded metal elements in the pre-separator restrict
the flow of much of the oil, dropping the surplus back into the oil pan.

11 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 11 Crankcase Breather System

Figure 11-1: Breather pre-separator schematic

1. Breather inlet tube to crankcase pressure regulator valve

2. Breather pre-separator

CRANKCASE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE


The crankcase pressure regulator valve is connected to the oil separator inlet piping. The
crankcase pressure regulating valve automatically adjusts to compensate for variations in
crankcase pressure due to changes in engine speed and load to maintain crankcase pres-
sure to specified levels. The valve assembly within the crankcase pressure control valve is
calibrated to move up and down in response to turbocharger source vacuum. This movement
opens or closes the through passage in the valve regulating the volume of air drawn from the
crankcase.

11 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Crankcase Breather System Chapter 11

Crankcase pressure
regulating valve

Figure 11-2: Crankcase pressure regulating valve

CRANKCASE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OPERATION

Diaphragm

To turbocharger

Flow from crankcase


Flow control
orifice is open

Figure 11-3: Cutaway of crankcase pressure regulating valve under low loads

Low load:

Under low load with minimal vacuum from the turbocharger, the diaphragm lowers to allow
higher flow of crankcase vapors (See “Figure 11-3: Cutaway of crankcase pressure regulating
valve under low loads”).

11 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 11 Crankcase Breather System

Diaphragm

To turbocharger

Flow from crankcase


Flow control
orifice restricts
flow

Figure 11-4: Cutaway of crankcase pressure regulating valve under full load

Full load:

Under higher loads with greater vacuum from the turbocharger, the diaphragm raises to
restrict the flow of crankcase vapors. (See “Figure 11-4: Cutaway of crankcase pressure reg-
ulating valve under full load”)

BREATHER SEPARATOR ASSEMBLY


The breather separator assembly is a canister with a replaceable coalescing element that
condenses oil vapor into liquid form so it can be transferred back to the crankcase. The crank-
case vapors are drawn from the breather by the turbocharger compressor into the air induc-
tion system and are burned in engine combustion.

The breather separator is wrapped with an insulation blanket. This blanket prevents any
moisture from the crankcase vapor from freezing. It also improves blow-by gas entrained oil
separation efficiency. This blanket must remain installed on the breather separator.

Breather Separator
Assembly with
Insulation

Figure 11-5: Breather separator assembly

11 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Crankcase Breather System Chapter 11
BREATHER CHECK VALVE
The check valve is located at the base of the drain tube. It allows oil to return to the engine
from the separator but prevents backflow of oil or vapor. The breather system components
and routing have been specifically designed for the engine and should not be modified. The
breather separator oil drain but exit below the oil pan oil level. The oil pan oil level must be
kept at the FULL mark at all times for proper breather system operation.

Breather Check
Valve

Figure 11-6: Breather check valve

MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance schedule should be followed for proper operation of the crank-
case breather system.

COMPONENT SERVICE INTERVAL MAINTENANCE


Breather separator element 8,000 hours Replace element
Return line check valve 8,000 hours Inspect, replace if needed
Pressure regulator valve 12,000 hours Clean/inspect, replace diaphragm if needed
Pre-separator screen 40,000 hours Clean/inspect

11 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 11 Crankcase Breather System

11 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Crankcase Pressure Relief Valves Chapter 12

CHAPTER 12 - CRANKCASE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES


OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

The number of crankcase pressure relief valves used on the en-


gine depends on the volume of the crankcase. Never operate the
engine without all necessary valves on the engine working prop-
erly. The ability of the system to function is dependent upon the
proper number of relief valves. Do not operate without the proper
type and number of relief valves, or without the relief being prop-
erly maintained. Operating the engine without the proper type
and number of relief valves may result in fire and explosion.

• Bicera crankcase pressure relief valves.

• Crankcase differential pressure switch.

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


• Crankcase pressure relief valves (when not using Waukesha option)

• Crankcase differential pressure switch (when not using Waukesha option)

DESCRIPTION
The VHP engines have been designed with optional crankcase pressure relief valves on the
crankcase doors. The number of relief valves are sized based on a ratio of 1.5 square inches
of relief area per cubic foot of crankcase volume. As a safety precaution, crankcase pressure
relief valves are available (see “Figure 12-1: Crankcase Pressure Relieve Valves”). The valves
open fully when the pressure in the crankcase exceeds 6.9kPa (1psi) and close tightly and
quickly to prevent the inflow of air after the internal pressure has been relieved. In this way,
the possibility of a secondary explosion is greatly reduced. The valves do not prevent crank-
case combustion, but only reduce the peak pressures during combustion, thereby minimizing
damage.

Since there are always flames present in any explosion, the valve incorporates an internal
flame trap to retard the emission of flame while the valve is venting. The flame trap is of an
oil-wetted wire gauze design. The cooling capacity of the gauze is doubled when it is oil-wet-
ted, a condition affected by the oil mist that normally exists in the crankcase or by an oil spray
from the connecting rod bearings. The valve incorporates the flame trap as a single unit and
the O-ring construction eliminates oil leakage.

12 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 12 Crankcase Pressure Relief Valves

Figure 12-1: Crankcase Pressure Relieve Valves

The engine should not be allowed to operate with positive crankcase pressure due to the
potential for a crankcase explosion. An engine safety pressure switch should be installed
to detect positive crankcase pressure. An optional crankcase differential pressure switch is
available which requires customer supplied alarm or shutdown logic in the event of a positive
pressure. Also the crankcase pressure is a good indication on the engine condition (i.e. in
event of catastrophic failure excessive blowby occurs resulting in high crankcase pressure).

MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
The seals in the explosion relief valves are intended to last for 16,000 hours before replace-
ment is necessary, depending on the operating temperatures, engine vibration, etc. If the
seals have gone over the seal life expectancy of 16,000 hours, they should be replaced to
prevent oil leakage.

Exercise and inspect the crankcase pressure relief valves annually to ensure that they are in
proper working condition.

12 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Combustion Air Intake System Chapter 13

CHAPTER 13 - COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE SYSTEM


INTAKE AIR REQUIREMENTS
• Air filter assemblies installed in a clean, dry location with minimal temperature variations

• Air filter assemblies installed with easy access to perform frequent air filter maintenance

• Intake air piping sized with minimal restriction

−− Total air induction system restriction (including air filter when dirty) less than 15 inches
(381 mm) H2O

• Intake air temperature less than 50°F (10°C) typically requires additional heating for effec-
tive engine starting

• Intake air temperature less than 0°F (-17.8°C) typically requires additional heating for ef-
fective engine operation

• Intake air temperature greater than 100°F (38°C) requires engine power reduction, refer to
EngCalc site specific power ratings

• Intake air system designed to minimize temperature variation from hot and cold sources

• Intake air filter protective panels removed before engine commissioning

• Turbocharger air inlet silencers are not available from Waukesha

STANDARD EQUIPMENT – 12 CYLINDER (GSI)


• Engine mounted air cleaners with rain shield (one per bank).

• One 3in (76mm) thick, dry type filter element (one per bank).

• A service indicator mounted in the air cleaner housing (one per bank).

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT – 12 CYLINDER (GSI)


• 2320B - Heavy duty inertia separator precleaners

NOTE: This replaces the standard rain shield, so rain protection will be needed.

• 2350 - Air cleaner housing modification for remote air intakes

STANDARD EQUIPMENT – 16 CYLINDER (P9394GSI)


• Engine mounted air cleaner assemblies (one per bank) for sheltered installation

• One 11.5in (292mm) thick, dry type filter element with pad type precleaner (one per bank).

• A service indicator mounted in the air cleaner housing (one per bank).

13 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 13 Combustion Air Intake System

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT – 16 CYLINDER (P9394GSI)


• 2341B - Omit standard air cleaner

• 2314C - Remote air cleaner for off-engine mounting – with inertial precleaner, without rain
shield

• 2314D - Remote air cleaner for off-engine mounting – without inertial precleaner, with
rain shield

• 2316 - Weather louvers for unsheltered installations – shipped loose

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


• Maintenance walkways for frequent changing of air filter elements (if necessary)

• Intake air heater for effective starting when combustion air inlet temperature will be less
than 50°F (10°C) or if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-17.8°C) for continuous operation.

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
L-08088-26 12 Cylinder outline drawing

L-08088-24 12Cylinder GC Spec outline drawing

L-08041-316 12 Cylinder Heavy duty precleaner drawing

L-0 8041-342 12 Cylinder Air cleaner housing modification for remote air intakes drawing

L-08049-109 P9394GSI outline drawing

L-08049-130 P9394GSI-GC Spec outline drawing

L-0 8049-132 P9394GSI remote air cleaner with rain shield drawing (2314C)

L-0 8049-131 P9394GSI remote air cleaner with weather louvers drawing (2314D)

L-0 8049-105 P9394GSI on –engine weather louvers drawing (2316)

EngCalc Engine data program for site specific combustion air flow rate

INTAKE AIR FILTRATION


The air intake filters used for VHP 12-cylinder engines are side-mounted on the rear of the
engine standard (one for each engine bank). Each air filter assembly consists of one dry main
air filter element and air restriction service indicator. The air filter assembly housings consist
of a standard hinged rain shield to easily replace the air filter element.

The VHP 16-cylinder uses two air filter assemblies, mounted on the top of the engine. Each
consists of an air filter frame, main air filter element, prefilter pad and air restriction indicator.

Outline drawings of the air filter assembly housings can be found in Waukesha’s standard
engine outline drawings on www.ge-distributedpower.com.

13 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Combustion Air Intake System Chapter 13

Figure 13-1: Standard air cleaner assembly mounted on a 12-Cylinder VHP

1. Air Cleaner Housing 4. Main Air Filter Element


2. Prefilter Clamps 5. Prefilter Frame with Hinged Grid
3. Decal 6. Prefilter Element (colored side in)

Figure 13-2: Standard air cleaner assembly for 16-Cylinder

For extremely dusty air conditions, heavy duty air filter housings are available which utilizes
inertial forces to remove a portion of the dust prior to reaching the main filter element. This
inertial type precleaner can be ordered from Waukesha and replaces the standard rain shield
on the air cleaner housing. It effectively filters out 70 – 90% of the large dirt particles in the
first stage, thereby reducing the dust load passed onto the second stage of the filter. The
precleaner is made up of various cyclone tubes. Large dirt particles are spun out of the air
as it is drawn through the cyclone tubes and fall into a dust bin located at the bottom of the
panel. These inertial type precleaners require the large dirt particles to be frequently emptied
(based on site conditions) from the dust bin using an included discharge valve at the bottom
of the dust bin. Each filter requires the customer to provide a cover to protect rain intrusion
when installed outdoors.

13 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 13 Combustion Air Intake System

Figure 13-3: Optional inertia precleaners (12 cyl, engine mounted, left/16 cyl, remote mounted,
right)

Air inlets must be located away from fuel tanks, flammable vapors, tank vents, chemicals,
industrial wastes or any other material of explosive nature. An engine backfire could ig-
nite such material causing a dangerous explosion. Also, these volatile fumes could be
drawn into the engine. Disregarding this information could result in severe personal inju-
ry or death.

Figure 13-4: Schematic of air filter inertia separators

If intake air is desired to be taken from outside the engine room/enclosure for 12-cylinder
models, the option code to modify the air cleaner housing should be selected. This modifi-
cation allows for the breather system to operate properly when using remote air intakes by
leaving the air filter housings on the engine. The modification provides a 5.5in (139.7mm)
outside diameter connection on the top of the filter housing which should be connected to
a customer supplied flexible hose to allow servicing of the air filter element without discon-
necting the customer piping. When designing the piping for remote air intake, the maximum
restriction of the air intake system must not be exceeded.

All pipes and fittings used to bring air into the system must
be absolutely free of dirt, scale and slag. Otherwise this
material may be drawn into the engine upon startup and
will damage engine components.

13 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Combustion Air Intake System Chapter 13

Figure 13-5: Air Cleaner Housing Modification for Remote Air Intakes

The 16 cylinder remote air filter option installs a special bracket on the engine and removes
the engine mounted air filters. The air filters will have to be mounted off-engine and piping
has to be installed between the engine and remote filter. See installation drawings for the
filter housing dimensions.

A total of 15” H2O restriction is allowed for the intake system. When the filter is mounted on
the engine that means the air filter can absorb 15” of restriction before the filter needs to be
changed. If the filter is mounted remotely and the piping adds an additional 5” H2O restriction
it means that the air filter must be changed once its restriction reaches 10” across the filter.

Waukesha supplied air filter assembly specifications with clean air filter elements (per
each assembly):

Restriction is based on standard conditions when running at full rated load. Restriction is
based on clean air filters and the restriction will increase as the filter element becomes dirty.
A reserve in restriction should be included to account for dirty air filter elements. The air re-
striction indicator will show “red” if the air intake restriction is 15 in. (381mm) of water. This
indicates a clogged or dirty main air filter element.

Table 13-1: Inlet Air Restriction

Engine Model Air Flow Rate* Standard Air Filter Inertia Precleaner +
(scfm) Restriction (in w.c.) Standard Air Filter
Restriction (in w.c.)

L7044GSI 2633 1.5 3.5

L7042GSI S4 2352 1.3 2.9

L5794GSI 2187 1.2 2.6

P9394GSI 3193 3.3 6.8

*Flow rates at 173psi BMEP (10% overload rating) @ 1200 RPM

13 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 13 Combustion Air Intake System

Red showing limit


reached

Figure 13-6: 12-cylinder Service Indicator

AIR TEMPERATURE
The temperature of the combustion air will vary depending on site conditions. It is preferred
to design the air intake system in a method that will reduce the amount of temperature vari-
ation as much as possible. High temperature air is less dense and has fewer molecules per
unit volume which reduces engine power output. The heat rejection to the intercooler can in-
crease significantly, resulting in an increase in the radiator or heat exchanger size also. Refer
to the Technical Data for engine specific derate information, or the latest EngCalc program
for power ratings at elevated ambient air temperatures.

Cold intake air can also adversely affect engine operation affecting turbocharger perfor-
mance and engine stability. Cold intake air creates a cold combustion chamber which can
cause turbocharger surge, delay ignition and create a cold combustion chamber which can
makestarting the engine difficult. In cold ambient temperatures, below 50°F (10°C), intake air
heating is typically required for effective engine starting, and below 0°F (-17.8°C) will require
heating for normal operation of the engine. Ducting air from the warm side of the radiator,
utilizing engine jacket water heat to warm ducted air through the use of a packager supplied
heat exchanger, or using warm engine room air are common methods of providing warm air
in cold climates. Water heaters for the intercooler circuit are not an effective form of heating
the combustion air because it does not heat the air upstream of the turbocharger which is
required to prevent turbo surge.

13 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Exhaust System Chapter 14

CHAPTER 14 - EXHAUST SYSTEM


EXHAUST SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
• Exhaust system must be properly supported with no forces applied to engine exhaust
connection

• Proper selection and placement of flexible connections, to account for thermal expansion
in both horizontal and vertical directions

• Adequate materials to be used, of sufficient strength and temperature capabilities. Rec-


ommended are listed below for guidance:

−− ANSI schedule 10 stainless steel pipe

−− ANSI schedule 20 carbon steel pipe

• Carbon steel piping should not be insulated. The higher temperatures and ability to trap
moisture can lead to the deterioration of the piping. Waukesha recommends using stain-
less steel piping when insulating piping.

• Exhaust piping and components sized with minimal restriction

−− Total exhaust system restriction less than 20 inches (508mm) H2O, at 173 BMEP (10%
overload) and 1200 RPM

−− Refer to S-7567-3 Ensure any exhaust transition sections are smooth (no abrupt tran-
sitions)

−− Exhaust elbow sections should be of the long radius type

• Piping should be sized to keep exhaust velocity less than 12,000 ft/min (60 m/sec). This will
keep exhaust restriction and exit noise low

• Explosion relief valves, if installed, should be located in the exhaust piping near the en-
gine to protect exhaust components from a damaging exhaust explosion. Explosion relief
valves must be vented to a safe location to prevent fires or personal injury.

• Silencer(s) should be sized using the proper exhaust flow rate, temperature, and to achieve
local/site sound attenuation requirements

• Moisture traps and drains - during startup of a cold system, water can condense and col-
lect in low spots of exhaust piping. Moisture traps and drains in the low spots provide a
way to remove this water. Many silencer manufacturers include drains in their equipment.
Piping should be sloped away from engine.

• Common Exhaust Systems – the use of a single exhaust system fed by multiple engines
is not allowed.

−− If an engine is not in operation, exhaust gas from other engines (s) can condense water
in the non-operating engine and result in damage.

−− The engine which is not in operation can also be a path for exhaust gas to leak.

• Maintenance considerations

−− Access to drain points

−− Access to allow for catalyst replacement, if applicable

14 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 14 Exhaust System

−− Access for emissions port sampling, if applicable

−− Clearance between exhaust system components and building cranes or other site
equipment

• Layout considerations

−− Exhaust outlet location and orientation should not be in the vicinity of the engine air
intake or radiators/coolers. Prevailing winds should be considered.

−− The exhaust outlet should be designed to keep out rain, dirt, and other debris. This can
be accomplished with a rain cap.

• Emissions – local requirements may require exhaust aftertreatment to attain specific


emissions levels. If required, such equipment should be appropriately sized considering
exhaust flow, temperature, and emissions produced by the bare engine.

• Exhaust purging - To prevent explosions and personal injury the engine and the exhaust
system are purged by cranking the engine for several seconds before the ignition is turned
on and the fuel valves are opened. The purge volume of the engine is approximately its
displacement for every two revolutions. Additional purge time can be added in ESM via a
user-programmable field. Up to 30 seconds can be added while still allowing the engine
to start.

• Thermocouples are not read by the ESM – if thermocouples are ordered the packager
must make provisions to read these signals in their own panel. Waukesha will provide a
wiring harness from the engine that will include loose ends for the customer panel.

Use high temperature gasket materials and proper room ventilation. Inadequate gaskets
can break down allowing poisonous exhaust gas to leak. These fumes can cause personal
injury or death.

Never discharge engine exhaust into a brick, tile, or cement


block chimney, or a similar structure. Exhaust pulsations
could cause severe structural damage.

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Standard Engine (non-GC Spec)

The exhaust system consists of the following components:

• Water cooled exhaust manifold segments (one per cylinder)

• Stainless steel flexible bellow to account for engine thermal growth and vibration

GC-Spec

The exhaust system consists of the following components:

• Water cooled exhaust manifold segments

• Stainless steel flexible bellow to account for engine thermal growth and vibration

• Exhaust thermocouples – K-type. One per cylinder, and pre-turbine. 50ft (15m) harness.

14 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Exhaust System Chapter 14
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard Engine (non-GC Spec)

• emPact Emissions Control System with catalyst sized for 0.50g/bhp-hr NOx and 1.0g/bhp-hr CO

• emPact Emissions Control System with catalyst sized for 0.15g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.3g/bhp-hr CO

• Exhaust thermocouples – K-type. One per cylinder, and pre-turbine. 25ft (7.6m) harness.

• 50ft (15m) or 200ft (60m) Exhaust thermocouple harness length

GC-Spec

• emPact Emissions Control System with catalyst sized for 0.50g/bhp-hr NOx and 1.0g/bhp-hr CO

• emPact Emissions Control System with catalyst sized for 0.15g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.3g/bhp-hr CO

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


• Exhaust Piping, supports

• Flex connections

• Silencer(s)

• Explosion relief valve(s) (if required)

• Emissions treatment equipment (if required)

• Hardware to read thermocouples (if equipped)

• Mounting hardware between customer piping and Waukesha connection flange(s)

• Gasket between Waukesha connection and customer exhaust piping

Legend
Growth (change in length) dee Note 1
Direction of growth (growth not allowed in
opposite direction)
Fixed (rigid) pipe mounte
Roller
Fexible connections must accomodate all
growth between rigid mounts

Figure 14-1: Example sketch of exhaust system layout

14 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 14 Exhaust System
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
L-08088-26 L5794GSI / L7042GSI S4 / L7044GSI outline drawing

L-08088-24 L5794GSI / L7042GSI S4 / L7044GSI-GC Spec outline drawing

L-08049-109 16-cylinder outline drawing

L-0 8049-130 16-cylinder GC Spec outline drawing

S-7567-3 Maximum permissible backpressure for VHP engines

App11_15 VHP 12-Cylinder Customer Exhaust System Support

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 14-1: Specifications

Engine model Maximum allowable Typical Temperature Connection Sizes


backpressure Range At bellow outlet
@ 100% load) (post-turbo) (standard)
L5794GSI
900 - 1200F 8” ANSI 125#
L7042GSI S4 20 in. H2O
(480 - 650C) flat faced flange
L7044GSI
14” ANSI 125#
900 - 1200F
P9394GSI 20 in. H2O Flat faced flange
(480 - 650C)
(one location)

BACKPRESSURE
The total exhaust system restriction must be less than 20 inches (508mm) H2O, at 173psi
BMEP (10% overload) and 1200 RPM. For 100% load at 1200RPM (158psi BMEP), the maxi-
mum permissible exhaust restriction is 17.75inches (mm) H2O. Refer to the figure below from
S-07567-3 which shows the maximum permissible backpressure vs. speed and BMEP for
12-cylinder Series 4 VHP – GSI engines.

Maximum Allowable Exhaust Backpressure – in. H2O (mm H2O = 25.4 x in. H2O; kPa = 0.25 x in. H2O)

Figure 14-2: Maximum Permissible Backpressure vs. Speed and BMEP for Series 4 VHP -GSI Engines

14 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Exhaust System Chapter 14
EXHAUST MANIFOLD SEGMENTS
12-Cylinder Exhaust Manifolds

The 12-cylinder VHP exhaust manifold consists of six individual cast-iron segments on each
bank, one exhaust manifold segment per cylinder. Each of these segments are water cooled,
but the connection pieces between the segments are not water cooled.

Connections
Water jumper between exhaust
Exhaust manifold
connection manifolds
(water cooled)

Figure 14-3: Exhaust Manifold Sections

16-Cylinder Exhaust Manifolds

The 16-cylinder VHP exhaust manifold consists of individual cast-iron segments, except for
the middle two cylinders of each bank. These middle sections span two cylinders and support
the turbos. Each of these segments is water cooled, but the connection pieces between the
segments are not water cooled.

Figure 14-4: 16-Cylinder Exhaust Manifold Sections

14 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 14 Exhaust System
EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLES
Thermocouples are used to monitor engine exhaust temperatures. The 12-cylinder VHP
engines have 14 thermocouples and the 16 cylinder engines have 18 thermocouples. One
thermocouple is provided for each of the cylinders and measures the exhaust temperatures
within the respective cylinder head exhaust port. There is also one pre-turbine thermocouple
for each turbocharger which is only intended to be used as a general indication of the rela-
tive exhaust temperature. These individual cylinder exhaust thermocouples and pre-turbine
thermocouples are not monitored by ESM. The packager must run the exhaust thermocouple
to the customer panel and read the thermocouple temperatures with their own hardware.
One exhaust stack temperature sensor (post-turbine, pre-catalyst) on each turbo charger
is standard with the AFR2 system. These sensors are monitored by the ESM system with an
alarm fault if the temperature is too high.

Waukesha includes a single connection point on the engine with a thermocouple harness
with optional lengths for connection to customer-supplied monitoring equipment. Monitor-
ing of exhaust temperatures can be useful for troubleshooting, for example aiding to detect
a cylinder which is not firing properly (this would be indicated by a temperature significantly
lower than other cylinders).

EXHAUST CONNECTION
12-Cylinder Exhaust Connection

Standard exhaust connection point is a single 8.00” ANSI flat face flange on the rear of the
engine. A flexible stainless steel connection is provided to account for the engine vibration
and thermal growth. This flexible connection is shipped loose to be installed by the packager
with supplied hardware. Gasket and hardware for connection to customer piping are not
included. The exhaust system must be supported beyond this point so no forces are directed
onto the engine.

The flexible connection that comes with the engine has the following characteristics:

• Axial extension: 0.23in (5.8mm)

• Axial compression: 0.23in (5.8mm)

• Lateral movement: 0.07in (1.8mm)

• Angular movement: 2.1°

• Approximate spring rate: 210lbs/in (76N/m)

14 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Exhaust System Chapter 14

Figure 14-5: 12-Cylinder Exhaust Connection

12-Cylinder Exhaust Support

The preferred exhaust mounting method is mounting the exhaust supports to the engine
foundation or engine enclosure. However, in instances that this might not be possible Wauke-
sha has determined an alternate mounting method. There are 6 available locations on the
engine to mount brackets to support the exhaust, but attention to Waukesha instructions is
critical in order to prevent engine damage. Waukesha is not responsible for any damage in-
curred through improper mounting. The figure below illustrates the 6 locations on the engine
that brackets can be mounted. There is a limit to the amount of force that can be applied to
the mounting locations and critical torque values that must be followed. Full details of the
mounting instructions can be found in the Application Note app11_15.

Figure 14-6: 12-Cylinder Exhaust Supports

14 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 14 Exhaust System
16-Cylinder Exhaust Connection

The exhaust connection point is a single 14.00” ANSI 125# flat face flange at the center of
the engine. Flexible stainless steel connections are provided to account for the engine vibra-
tion and thermal growth. These flexible connections are shipped loose to be installed by the
packager with supplied hardware. Gasket and hardware for connection to customer piping
are not included. The exhaust system must be supported beyond this point so no forces are
directed onto the engine.

The flexible connections that comes with the engine have the following characteristics:

• Axial compression: 0.53in (13.5mm)

• Lateral movement: 0.31in (8mm)

• Angular movement: 0°

• Approximate axial spring rate: 320 lbs/in (56 N/m)

Figure 14-7: 16-Cylinder Exhaust Wye

14 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Exhaust System Chapter 14
16-Cylinder Exhaust Support

There are 4 brackets mounted on top of the intercooler that can help the customer create a
support for the exhaust. These brackets are only rated to handle 60 pounds each. If this limit
is exceeded the intercooler could leak and/or other engine components could crack. These
locations are not designed to carry the weight of the exhaust system but are available for
supporting the supplied exhaust flexes and wye connection. The exhaust system should be
supported past the exhaust wye and thermal growth of the exhaust system should be pre-
vented from imposing forces on the engine mounted components. See the picture below for
the location of these 4 brackets (some components have been hidden for clarity). Damage
caused by excessive force to these brackets will not be covered by Waukesha’s warranty; the
best practice is to not mount exhaust support brackets on the engine.

Figure 14-8: 16-Cylinder Exhaust Supports

THERMAL EXPANSION AND EXHAUST FLEXIBLE JOINTS


Allow for thermal expansion of the exhaust pipe beyond the Waukesha connection. The
Waukesha exhaust flex will accommodate engine thermal expansion but cannot tolerate
movement imposed by external thermal growth. Insulated pipes will run hotter and conse-
quently expand more.

• Remember that a flex connection has “spring constants” (lateral, axial, radial, torsional)
that should be considered when engineering the exhaust system. Transmission of forces
to the engine exhaust system (engine exhaust flange) must be nil.

• The exhaust flex connection should be designed to allow for flexing caused by engine
operation, acceleration, deceleration, starting and stopping. The Waukesha exhaust flex
will accommodate engine vibrations with a solidly mounted unit, but cannot tolerate the
additional forces/displacement imposed by mounting on spring isolators. Additional flex
capabilities will be required when the unit is mounted on isolators.

• Consider expected life. Cyclic flexing can lead to premature failure by causing fatigue
breakage.

• Reference document app10_91 available in Waukesha technical data.

14 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 14 Exhaust System

14 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
emPact Emission Control System Chapter 15

CHAPTER 15 - emPact EMISSION CONTROL


emPact REQUIREMENTS
• Mounting of emPact catalyst within 25 linear pipe feet of 14 in. diameter piping from the
exhaust outlet

• Designed so inlet temperatures to the catalyst are 900°F - 1300°F (482°C – 704°C)

• Assemble shipped loose catalyst components as shown in S7232-374

• Install supplied expansion joint between the engine and catalyst

• Expansion joints in the exhaust system to allow for thermal expansion

• Setup of air/fuel ratio control during engine commissioning

• The engine’s fuel gas must meet Waukesha’s fuel spec S-7884-7

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
Form 6388-1 VHP 12-cylinder engine operation & maintenance manual

Form 6398-1 VHP 16-cylinder engine operation & maintenance manual

S7232-374 emPact Emission Control System Installation Instructions

L8041-335 VHP 12-cylinder emPact Emission Control System outline drawing for
0.5 g/bhp-hr NOx & 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx

L8049-129 VHP 16-cylinder emPact Emissions Control System outline drawing for
0.5 g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx)

S7884-7 Gaseous Fuel Specification

EMPACT OVERVIEW
The purpose of the emPact emission control system is to provide a complete Waukesha solu-
tion that is capable of achieving the latest air quality regulations. Two option codes are avail-
able to meet varying levels of emissions requirements.

Option Code Outline Drawing NOx [g/bhp-hr] CO [g/bhp-hr]


1004 (12-CYL.) L8041-335 (12-CYL.) 0.5 1.0
1004A (16-CYL.) L8049-129 (16-CYL.) 0.5 1.0
1005 (12-CYL.) L8041-333 (12-CYL.) 0.15 0.3
1005A (16-CYL.) L8049-129 (16-CYL.) 0.15 0.3

These levels are achievable by using Waukesha’s AFR2 fuel control system, properly sized
catalyst elements and pre-/post-O2 sensors. The following components comprise the em-
Pact emission system:

• Catalytic converter (stainless steel housing with 2 or 3 removable elements)

• Emissions Control Module*

• HMI (Human Machine Interface)*

• Pre-catalyst temperature RTD sensor

15 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 15 emPact Emission Control System

• Post-catalyst temperature RTD sensor

• Pre-catalyst pressure sensor

• Post-catalyst pressure sensor

• Pre-catalyst O2 and RTD sensors (left and right bank)*

• Post-catalyst O2 sensor

* Supplied with or without emPact emission control system, all others specific to emPact

The fuel control system also plays a vital role in producing a complete package that can
achieve low emissions. A very specific air/fuel ratio must be maintained in order for the cat-
alyst to operate at a high efficiency. This is achieved using Waukesha AFR2 system; more
information can be found in the AFR2 air/fuel ratio control section.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The converter housing is a large chamber made of stainless steel. The catalyst elements are
positioned in the center of the housing and held in place by clamp rings. The elements are ac-
cessible through a bolted hatch. At each end of the housing are pipe flanges for attaching the
converter to the exhaust system. There are ports for the O2, RTD and pressure sensors. Also,
there is a post-catalyst exhaust sample port (0.375” – 18 NPT) for verifying emission levels.

1 Exhaust Sample Probe 4 Pre-Catalyst Temperature RTD Sensor


2 Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor 5 Post-Catalyst Pressure Sensor
3 Post-Catalyst Temperature RTD Sensor 6 Pre-Catalyst Pressure Sensor

Figure 15-1: emPact Emission System Sensors (12-cylinder)

The removable element resembles a large honeycomb disc which consists of a finely wound
ferric steel metal foil corrugated substrate material that is coated with precious metals. The
entire element is banded into a large disc for easy replacement and inspection. The catalyst
is classified as a (NSCR) Non Selective Catalytic Reduction or 3-way catalyst. This type of cat-
alyst is suitable for rich burn engines and is similar to automotive catalysts as it reduces NOx,
CO and HC simultaneously.

15 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
emPact Emission Control System Chapter 15

7 8 9

5
4

10

1 Inlet Flange 6 Catalyst Spacerr


2 Inlet Cone + Center body Assembly 7 Flat Hatch Gasket
3 Catalyst Lockbolts (3) 8 Flat Hatch Cover
4 Catalyst (2) 9 Flat Hatch Cover Bolts
5 Catalyst Retainer Ring 10 Name Plate
NOTE:Flat and spring washers removed for clarity.

Figure 15-2: Non-Silenced Housing Option Shown (12-cylinder)

EMISSIONS CONTROL MODULE


The Emission Control Module (ECM) is an electronic control module used to control the Fuel
Control Valves (FCV). The ECM works with the Engine Control Unit (ECU) by using multiple sys-
tem inputs to control the FCVs position through the engine’s varying load and speed ranges.
The ECM is supplied signals from the:

• Inlet air temperature/pressure/humidity sensor

• Flywheel sensor

• Pre-catalyst temperature RTD sensor*

• Post-catalyst temperature RTD sensor*

• Pre-catalyst pressure sensor*

• Post-catalyst pressure sensor*

• Pre-catalyst O2 and RTD sensors (left and right bank)

• Post-catalyst O2 sensor*

* Only with emPact emission control system

15 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 15 emPact Emission Control System
The ECM is connected and works with the following devices:

• FCV – The fuel control valves uses ECM input to set and adjust valve position.

• HMI – The HMI allows site input to ECM. The HMI also allows MODBUS output to the site

• ECU – The ECU works with ECM to control engine operation and information data flow into
the ECM, ALMs and ESDs and out to ECU.

HMI
The HMI provides the interface to the fuel system. It displays status, settings, alarms and his-
tory. Commands are performed using the keys on the HMI’s faceplate. The USB Port is used
to retrieve recorded data logs (in .CSV format for analysis purposes) as well as to update/
re-program the HMI. Data is recorded at a 1 Hz frequency and will record up to three days of
information before the oldest data is overwritten. The HMI interfaces with the ECM and ECU
through CAN communication for displayed values, faults and calibrations. The temperature
rating for the HMI panel is -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C). The cap must be installed on the USB
port when not in use to maintain CSA compliance in hazardous locations.

PRE-CATALYST O2 SENSOR
Each bank has one wideband pre-catalyst O2 RTD sensor. The wideband sensor allows for
stable operation at nearly any setpoint. This optimizes performance for gaseous fuel and
minimizes change in oxygen during fuel swings for steadier emissions with varying fuel.

Figure 15-3: Pre-Catalyst O2 RTD Sensors (12-cylinder)

POST-CATALYST O2 SENSOR – EMPACT EMISSION SYSTEM ONLY


A narrowband post-catalyst O2 RTD sensor is located in the catalyst. The narrowband sensor
provides quicker response to variation. It also minimizes ammonia interference, providing a
more accurate reading.

CATALYST HEALTH MONITORING SENSORS – EMPACT EMISSION SYSTEM ONLY


Two RTD sensors (one pre- and one post-catalyst) monitor catalyst temperatures. These val-
ues along with the calculated differential are displayed on the HMI. All three values have
user-adjustable alarm and shutdown setpoints. Two pressure sensors (one pre- and one
post-catalyst) monitor catalyst pressure. These values along with the calculated differential
are displayed on the HMI. All three values have user-adjustable alarm and shutdown set-
points.

15 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
emPact Emission Control System Chapter 15
SETUP FOR CATALYST CONTROL
The target setting is chosen to optimize engine out emissions for a three-way catalyst input.
Three-way catalysts are used to oxidize carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC), and
to reduce oxides of nitrogen (NOx) on rich burn applications. These processes require high
temperature and precise air/fuel ratio control. Best performance for emissions reduction is
achieved when operating slightly rich of the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio.

The stoichiometric air/fuel ratio is the theoretical balance where exactly the required amount
of air (O2) is present to completely burn all of the fuel with no excess air. In an ideal case, the
only products of this combustion would be water (H2O) and carbon dioxide (CO2). However,
because engine combustion is not perfect, typical emission by-products include O2, HC, NOx
and CO. The catalyst then converts most of these to H2O, CO2 and nitrogen (N2).

The wideband oxygen sensor in the exhaust stream provides feedback to the ECM. The signal
provides a means of controlling air/fuel ratio slightly rich of stoichiometry.

CONTROL ROUTINE WITH EMPACT EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM


The emPact Emission Control System ECM controls the engine air/fuel ratio by regulating the
quantity of oxygen in the stream. In the FULL AUTO mode, if the actual post-catalyst

sensor voltage is different from the sensor’s voltage setpoint (determined by the user), the
value of the precatalyst sensor setpoint will be adjusted by the ECM. The ECM will communi-
cate with the FCVs to adjust until the new desired pre-catalyst setpoint is achieved.

EMPACT DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS


Exhaust system design considerations specific to the emPact catalyst system are listed be-
low. All other Waukesha recommendations for general exhaust system installations from
“Chapter 14: Exhuast System” should also be followed.

• It is required to mount the converter no more than 25 linear feet (7.6 m) of 14 in. (35.6 cm)
diameter piping away from the transition mounted to the engine exhaust flex flange and
upstream of an exhaust silencer if so equipped

• Install supplied expansion joints between the engine exhaust flange and the converter in-
let flange. This will isolate the converter and other downstream components from engine
vibration and thermal expansion.

• Ensure exhaust temperatures to the catalyst are between 900°F and 1300°F for all engine
operating conditions.

• Do not lift the converter from the center body area; only lift it from the flange ends

• Only use supplied fasteners. Do not substitute with unknown grade fasteners. Contact
Waukesha Parts for replacement parts. High temp anti-seize should be used on the fas-
teners.

• The converter must be structurally supported from beneath the converter center body
and mounted horizontally. This structural support needs to allow for expansion of the
housing due to thermal loads. Do not support the converter by the flanges.

• The exhaust system must remain air tight at all times for proper operation of the convert-
er. Pressure relief valves, flexible connections, flanges, water traps/drains and piping may
leak over time and may require repair or replacement to maintain an air tight exhaust
system.

15 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 15 emPact Emission Control System
• A burst disk located in the exhaust piping near the engine can protect exhaust compo-
nents from a damaging exhaust explosion. Burst disks must be vented to a safe location
to prevent fires or personal injury. These devices will become damaged or leak after an
exhaust explosion occurs which will require replacement or repair. These devices must be
air-tight.

• Sufficient clearance must be allowed for the converter hatch to open and for element
replacement. Options are available to remove the catalyst elements vertically or horizon-
tally. See “Table 15-2:” for element weights.

Figure 15-4: emPact catalyst installed

Exhaust system restriction must be taken into account while designing the exhaust system.
See “Table 15-1:” for exhaust pressure drop across the catalyst. This data is given at 158 psi
BMEP, 1200 RPM and adds 2 inches water column to account for ash/soot accumulation on
the catalyst. If pressure drop across the catalyst exceeds the values listed in the table below
it may indicate a need for catalyst washing.

Table 15-1:

Engine Model Option Code Catalyst Size Backpressure [inches of H2O]


L5794GSI 1004 0.5 g NOx 5.0
L5794GSI 1005 0.15 g NOx 4.5
L7044GSI 1004 0.5 g NOx 5.5
L7044GSI 1005 0.15 g NOx 5.0
P9394GSI 1004A 0.5 g NOx 6.1
P9394GSI 1005A 0.15 g NOx 7.7

CATALYTIC CONVERTER INSTALLATION


Do not lift the converter from the center body area or catalyst cover handles; only lift it from
the flange ends.

The catalytic converter weighs approximately 550 lb (249 kg) for


0.5 g NOx converter, 645 lb (293 kg) for 0.15 g NOx converter. Al-
ways use suitable rigging and lifting equipment.

15 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
emPact Emission Control System Chapter 15

Lifting1 Straps

Flow

Figure 15-5: emPact lifting points

Most of this assembly should be done prior to lifting into place. This will save time and avoid
working several feet above the ground. A detailed assembly drawing is available on S7232-
374.

Table 15-2:

Engine Option Outline NOx Catalyst Catalyst Number of


Code Drawing [g/bhp-hr] Assembly element (each) elements
12-Cylinder 1004 L8041-335 0.5 550 lbs (249kg) 55 lbs (25kg) 2
12-Cylinder 1005 L8041-333 0.15 645 lbs (293kg) 70 lbs (32kg) 2
16-Cylinder 1004A L8049-129 0.5 762 lbs (346kg) 70 lbs (32kg) 2
16-Cylinder 1005A L8049-129 0.15 806 lbs (367kg) 70 lbs (32kg) 3

NOTE: It is recommended that the catalyst be supported from the bottom. A suitable support
needs to be added under the bottom of the catalyst. Catalyst assembly weight includes about
200 lbs (91 kg) for the wireway, heat shield and brackets.

1. Install heat shield onto catalyst housing.

2. Install wireway onto catalyst housing.

3. Install the thermocouples, pre and post into the catalyst and plug into the harnesses.

4. Install the pressure sensors tubing, pre- and post-,into the catalyst and the wireway.

Be careful during the lifting process to not damage the


pressure tubes or the sensors.

15 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 15 emPact Emission Control System
5. Support the converter housing flange ends, using a suitable lifting device, and lift the con-
verter housing into position.

6. Align the inlet and outlet flanges with their connecting flanges and insert supplied gaskets
as required.

Make sure the catalyst flow direction is correct. The direc-


tional arrow on the converter housing must match the flow
direction of exhaust gas.

7. Install all supplied mounting fasteners loosely, allowing for movement until final tighten-
ing.

8. Check alignment of flanges to make sure flanges are squarely aligned and no binding is
evident.

9. Torque all flange fasteners.

10. Make sure that the exhaust system after the converter is independently supported.

Do not weld to the converter housing.

HMI INSTALLATION
See HMI Installation section in Chapter 16: Fuel Systems for installation instructions.

The HMI provides the interface to the fuel system. It displays status, settings, alarms and his-
tory. Commands are performed using the keys on the HMI’s faceplate. The USB Port is used
to retrieve recorded data logs (in .CSV format for analysis purposes) as well as to update/
re-program the HMI.

Figure 15-6: HMI installation

15 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
emPact Emission Control System Chapter 15
EMPACT, AFR2 SETUP
The emPact control system is configured through the provided HMI panel. This easy to use,
step-by-step process significantly minimizes the time to set the engine up for catalyst control.
All of the instructions are displayed on the screen and the entire setup process takes less than
one hour.

For more detailed information and step-by-step instructions see Chapter 20: Engine Com-
missioning.

Prior to start-up it is recommended that the process run, before installing the catalyst ele-
ments, for a sufficient period of time to clear all debris in the flow path upstream from the
catalyst. This protects the catalyst from experiencing any adverse conditions such as over
temperature or contamination during initial engine set-up. Catalyst elements can be perma-
nently damaged when exposed to continuous misfires and when engine start-up procedures
have been ignored.

EMPACT MAINTENANCE
During normal operation accumulation of soot, ash or other by-products of combustion will
reduce the effectiveness of catalyst elements. Although, there are some non-standard oper-
ating conditions which can result in premature loss of catalyst activity. Therefore, a periodic
[annual] inspection and maintenance program will assure the catalyst retains its full activity.

To inspect the catalyst unit, remove the element and visually examine the catalyst for any
physical damage or obstructed passages, especially on the inlet face. Excessive cell blockage
must be cleared by cleaning the catalyst. More information on the catalyst condition and
cleaning process can be found in the O&M Manual, Form 6388-1 (12-cylinder), and Form
6398-1 (16-cylinder).

15 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 15 emPact Emission Control System

15 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Fuel System Chapter 16

CHAPTER 16 - FUEL SYSTEM

AFR2 AIR/FUEL RATIO CONTROL


FUEL SYSTEM / AFR2 REQUIREMENTS
• Mounting of HMI panel in local control panel or compressor panel

• HMI panel installed in a location with an ambient temperature between -40° to 158°F (-40°
to 70°C).

• Wiring of HMI panel to customer interface harness

• 24 VDC, 2 amp fused power supply to HMI

• Setup of air/fuel ratio control during engine commissioning

• Fuel pressure at inlet flange of engine mounted fuel valve between 30 – 60 psig (207 – 414
kPa)

• Fuel piping sized for maximum fuel flow with minimal piping restriction

• Coalescing fuel filter installed as close to the engine inlet as possible when fuel contains
water vapor or heavy hydrocarbons

• Fuel meets Waukesha’s latest fuel specification S-7884-7 in technical data

• Additional pressure regulators installed upstream of engine if fuel pressure at engine ex-
ceeds 60 psig.

−− For fuels containing water vapor or heavy hydrocarbons, a coalescing fuel filter and
possibly fuel heater is installed between the high pressure regulator and engine con-
nection to remove liquids from the fuel at the engine inlet pressure.

• Fuel LHV variation within ±6%. Fuel variation greater than 6% requires engine adjustment.

• Customer supplied fuel shut-off valve wired to the ESM with supplied harness. A surge sup-
pression diode must also be installed. Waukesha requires a “freewheeling” diode (1N4002
or equivalent rated for 100V and 1A) be added across the coils of relays and solenoids to
suppress high induced voltages that may occur when equipment is turned off.

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Single 3” ANSI flange fuel inlet connection. Two natural gas, 4” (102 mm) updraft carburetors
and two mounted Fisher 99, 2” (51 mm) gas regulators, 30-60 psi (207-414 kPa) fuel inlet pres-
sure required. 10 foot (3 m) harness provided for ESM control of customer supplied fuel shutoff
valve. The AFR2 fuel control valve is located between regulator and carburetor.

16 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 16 Fuel System

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

The standard fuel system for the VHP 12 and 16 cylinders are capable of operating on fuels
that have an LHV of 850 - 2400 BTU/ft3 (33.4 - 94.4 MJ/nm3). Option code 2200 changes the
fuel regulator spring and carburetor insert to allow operation on 700 - 850 BTU/ft3 (27.5 - 33.4
MJ/nm3) fuels.

A low fuel pressure system is available to allow operation on a fuel gas supply that has a min-
imum pressure of 15 inches (381mm) of water column. The emPact emission control system
is not currently available on engines with the low fuel pressure system.

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


• Fuel piping connections to engine

• Flexible connection to engine

• Fuel filter

• Fuel coalescing filter

• Fuel treatment system (when needed)

• Customer supplied fuel shut-off valve wired to the ESM with supplied harness. A surge sup-
pression diode must also be installed. Waukesha requires a “freewheeling” diode (1N4002
or equivalent rated for 100V and 1A) be added across the coils of relays and solenoids to
suppress high induced voltages that may occur when equipment is turned off.

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
S-7382-162 HMI installation instructions

Form 6388 Engine operation & maintenance manual

S-8685-11 ESM schematic with AFR2

16 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Fuel System Chapter 16
FUEL SYSTEM / AFR2 OVERVIEW
The function of the fuel system is to maintain a constant air/fuel ratio throughout the load
range of the engine and to deliver the air/fuel mixture in the proper quantities. The following
components comprise the engine fuel system:

• Main Fuel Pressure Regulators (left and right side)

• Carburetors (left and right side)

• Fuel Control Valves (left and right side)

• Emission Control Module

EMISSIONS CONTROL MODULE


The Emission Control Module (ECM) is an electronic control module used to control the Fuel
Control Valves (FCV). The ECM works with the Engine Control Unit (ECU) by using multiple sys-
tem inputs to control the FCVs position through the engine’s varying load and speed ranges.
The ECM is supplied signals from the:

• Inlet air temperature/pressure/humidity sensor

• Flywheel sensor

• Pre-catalyst temperature RTD sensor*

• Post-catalyst temperature RTD sensor*

• Pre-catalyst pressure sensor*

• Post-catalyst pressure sensor*

• Pre-catalyst O2 RTD sensor (left and right bank)

• Post-catalyst O2 sensor*

* With emPact emission control system

The ECM is connected and works with the following devices:

• FCV – The fuel control valves uses ECM input to set and adjust valve position.

• HMI – The HMI allows site input to ECM. The HMI also allows MODBUS output to the site

• ECU – The ECU works with ECM to control engine operation and information data flow into
the ECM, ALMs and ESDs and out to ECU.

HMI
The HMI provides the interface to the fuel system. It displays status, settings, alarms and his-
tory. Commands are performed using the keys on the HMI’s faceplate. The USB Port is used
to retrieve recorded data logs (in .CSV format for analysis purposes) as well as to update/
re-program the HMI. Data is recorded at a 1 Hz frequency and will record up to three days of
information before the oldest data is overwritten. The HMI interfaces with the ECM and ECU
through CAN communication for displayed values, faults and calibrations. The temperature
rating for the HMI panel is -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C). The cap must be installed on the USB
port when not in use to maintain CSA compliance in hazardous locations.

16 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 16 Fuel System
PRE-CATALYST O2 SENSOR
Each bank has one wideband pre-catalyst O2 RTD sensor. The wideband sensor allows for
stable operation at nearly any setpoint. This optimizes performance for gaseous fuel and
minimizes change in oxygen during fuel swings for steadier emissions with varying fuel.

Figure 16-1: Pre-Catalyst O2 RTD Sensors (12-cylinder)

POST-CATALYST O2 SENSOR – EMPACT EMISSION SYSTEM ONLY


A narrowband post-catalyst O2 RTD sensor is located in the catalyst. The narrowband sensor
provides quicker response to variation. It also minimizes ammonia interference, providing a
more accurate reading.

CATALYST HEALTH MONITORING SENSORS – EMPACT EMISSION SYSTEM ONLY


Two RTD sensors (one pre- and one post-catalyst) monitor catalyst temperatures. These val-
ues along with the calculated differential are displayed on the HMI. All three values have
user-adjustable alarm and shutdown setpoints. Two pressure sensors (one pre- and one
post-catalyst) monitor catalyst pressure. These values along with the calculated differential
are displayed on the HMI. All three values have user-adjustable alarm and shutdown set-
points.

TRI-SENSOR
A Tri-Sensor, mounted in the right bank air cleaner housing, provides temperature, humidity,
and barometric pressure display on the HMI.

Figure 16-2: Inlet Air Temp./Pressure/Humidity Sensor (12-cylinder)

16 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Fuel System Chapter 16
FUEL CONTROL VALVES
A Fuel Control Valve (FCV) is located on each engine bank. The FCV is an electronically con-
trolled valve used to adjust fuel flow into each carburetor. The FCV is controlled by input from
the ECM and ECU. The minimum percent and maximum percent for the open position of the
FCVs are adjusted through the HMI.

Figure 16-3: Fuel Control Valve

CARBURETORS
One carburetor is mounted on each bank just below the center of each intake manifold. The
carburetor produces a combustible mixture by automatically mixing fuel from the FCV and
air from the turbocharger.

AFR2/EMPACT CONTROL
The engine’s Air/Fuel Ratio (AFR) is controlled by the ECM. An engine’s air/fuel ratio is the
amount of air measured by mass in relation to the mass of fuel supplied to an engine for
combustion. By controlling an engine’s air/fuel ratio with ECM AFR control, exhaust emissions
are minimized while maintaining peak engine performance. The AFR control regulates the
engine’s air/fuel ratio even with changes in engine load, fuel pressure, fuel quality and envi-
ronmental conditions.

THEORY OF OPERATION
Control Routine Without Factory Supplied Catalyst

The ECM AFR routine controls engine air/fuel ratio by regulating the quantity of oxygen pres-
ent in the exhaust stream. If the actual O2 sensor voltage is different from the O2 sensor
voltage setpoint, the ECM AFR routine directs the FCV to adjust the gas flow to the carburetor.
The FCV adjusts in position, within programmed limits, increasing or decreasing the fuel flow
to the carburetor.

SETUP FOR CATALYST CONTROL


The target setting is chosen to optimize engine out emissions for a three-way catalyst input.
Three-way catalysts are used to oxidize carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC), and
to reduce oxides of nitrogen (NOx) on rich burn applications. These processes require high
temperature and precise air/fuel ratio control. Best performance for emissions reduction is
achieved when operating slightly rich of the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio.

16 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 16 Fuel System
The stoichiometric air/fuel ratio is the theoretical balance where exactly the required amount
of air (O2) is present to completely burn all of the fuel with no excess air. In an ideal case, the
only products of this combustion would be water (H2O) and carbon dioxide (CO2). However,
because engine combustion is not perfect, typical emission by-products include O2, HC, NOx
and CO. The catalyst then converts most of these to H2O, CO2 and nitrogen (N2).

The wideband oxygen sensor in the exhaust stream provides feedback to the ECM. The signal
provides a means of controlling air/fuel ratio slightly rich of stoichiometry.

CONTROL ROUTINE WITH EMPACT EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM


The emPact Emission Control System ECM controls the engine air/fuel ratio by regulating the
quantity of oxygen in the exhaust stream. In the FULL AUTO mode, if the actual post-catalyst

sensor voltage is different from the sensor’s voltage setpoint (determined by the user), the
value of the precatalyst sensor setpoint will be adjusted by the ECM. The ECM will communi-
cate with the FCVs to adjust until the new desired pre-catalyst setpoint is achieved.

HMI INSTALLATION
1. Remove the six fasteners from the perimeter of the front plate assembly
(see “Figure 16-4:”).

Figure 16-4:

2. Disconnect the harnesses from port B and port D (see “Figure 16-5:”).
TO P
TO P ORT D

TO P ORT B

Figure 16-5:

16 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Fuel System Chapter 16
3. Cut out opening in control panel for HMI panel. A full size template is included in the box
with the HMI from the factory, and is also available on S-7382-162 in the Outline Drawing
Index for Waukesha gas engines. A sample (not to be used for construction) is shown in
“Figure 16-6:”.

13.00 in. (330 mm)


6.50 in. (165 mm)

4.875 in. (124 mm)


2.00 in. 2.50 in.
(51 mm) 9.75 in. (248 mm) (64 mm)

4.00 in. 5.00 in.


(102 mm) CAUTION: DO NOT USE THIS SHEET AS A CUTOUT TEMPLATE.
(128 mm)

8X 0.25 in. 4X R.00- 0.25 in.


(6.4 mm) (6.4 mm)

5.50 in. (140 mm)


11.00 in. (280 mm)

Figure 16-6:

4. Align the rear enclosure assembly with the hole pattern on the inside of the control panel
(see “Figure 16-7:”)

Figure 16-7:

16 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 16 Fuel System
5. Install the two outmost fasteners on the rear enclosure assembly into their respective
holes in the control panel. Install the O-rings and nuts. Torque the nuts to 7 – 8 in.-lb (0.7 –
0.9 N.m.) (see “Figure 16-8:”

Figure 16-8:

6. Reconnect the harnesses to port B and port D (see “Figure 16-5:”)

7. Align the gasket with the mounting holes in the front plate assembly. Install the screws
and O-rings. Torque the nuts to 7 – 8 in.-lb (0.7 – 0.9 N.m.) (see “Figure 16-9:”).

Figure 16-9:

16 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Fuel System Chapter 16
8. Make the HMI connections as indicated in Table 1. Wiring connections must be installed in
accordance with NEC for Class 1, Div. 2, Groups B, C, and D; T4 (ambient temperature -40°F
to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C) hazardous locations.

NOTE: A 2-amp fuse is required for CSA between the power supply and terminal No. 9 of the
HMI (see “Figure 16-10:”).

TERM.
4
5
6

9
10

13
14

Figure 16-10:

Table 16-1: HMI Wiring Connections

WIRE DESCRIPTION FROM COLOR TO


1305O RS 485A- WAUKESHA CUSTOMER INTERFACE HARNESS GREEN HMI TERMINAL 4
1306O RS 485B+ WAUKESHA CUSTOMER INTERFACE HARNESS YELLOW HMI TERMINAL 5
1145O RS485SHD WAUKESHA CUSTOMER INTERFACE HARNESS DRAIN HMI TERMINAL 6
24 VDC POS. (+) USER POWER SUPPLY (10-30 VDC) RED HMI TERMINAL 9
24 VDC NEG. (-) USER POWER SUPPLY (10-30 VDC) BLACK HMI TERMINAL 10
RS 485A- (OUT) HMI TERMINAL 13 WHITE USER PANEL
RS 485B+ (OUT) HMI TERMINAL 14 GREY USER PANEL

MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
The filter of the main fuel gas pressure regulators should be cleaned or replaced regularly. If
clogging is suspected in the upstream regulator passages, more frequent cleaning may be
required. Operation of the fuel system and AFR2 system components should be inspected
periodically to maintain proper engine operation and maintain emissions compliance. This
may include periodic verification of engine emissions and exhaust O2 settings. Adjustments
should be made as needed by following the AFR2 setup on the HMI, refer to the latest version
of the engine Operation & Maintenance manual (Form 6388) for more details.

16 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 16 Fuel System

16 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Starting System Chapter 17

CHAPTER 17 - STARTING SYSTEM


STARTING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
• Adequately sized starter for turning over the engine and driven equipment

• High pressure air or gas supply (for pneumatic starter options): 90-150 psig (620 – 1030
kPa) for high pressure, 60-90 psig (415 – 620 kPa) for low pressure

• Piping to and from the starter, sized to reduce restriction and supply appropriate pressure

• Flex connections used at starter inlets and outlets (for pneumatic starter options)

• Starter and solenoid valve exhausts piped to safe location if combustible gas is used (for
pneumatic starter options)

• Power wiring (24VDC) to starters (for electric starter option)

• Refer to S-7447-08 for properly sizing the air starter requirements

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Standard Engines:

• Customer-supplied starter

• ESM control of the starter motor

• Starter motor pad for SAE number 3 motor mounting flange

Gas Compression (GC) - spec Engines

• High pressure, turbine-type, inertia engaged, pneumatic starter with Y-strainer

• Electronically controlled through a normally closed, CSA Class I Div II, 24VDC solenoid
valve which is actuated when it receives a signal from ESM

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard Engines:

• High or low pressure pneumatic starter - turbine-type, inertia engaged, with Y-strainer.

• Two 24VDC electric starters (for use in non-hazardous areas) - 24VDC, positive engage-
ment, 9.0 kW maximum output (per starter), with 11 tooth pinion (12-cylinder only)

• Dual pneumatic high pressure starters, pre-engaged, with integral strainer (eliminates use
of manual barring device). (Dual low pressure starters available only on the 16 cylinder.)

GC - spec Engines:

• Low pressure pneumatic starter, in place of the standard high pressure starter

• Dual pneumatic high pressure starters, in place of the standard high pressure starter
(eliminates use of manual barring device). (Dual low pressure starters available only on
the 16 cylinder.))

17 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 17 Starting System

CUSTOMER CONNECTION
• Waukesha-supplied high or low pressure pneumatic starter:

−− Starter Inlet - 1.5” ANSI 150# raised face flange (each starter)

−− Starter Outlet - 3” ANSI 150# raised face flange (each starter)

−− Starter valve solenoid outlet/exhaust with removable mufflers

• 12-cylinder: (qty 2) 0.25” NPT

• 16-cylinder: (qty 1) 0.25” NPT and (qty 1) 0.5” NPT)

• Waukesha-supplied electric starter:

−− Electric power supply

• Customer-supplied pneumatic starter:

−− Starting motor pad, for motors with SAE number 3 mounting flange

−− Pneumatic supply to starter valve solenoid: 0.25” – 18 NPT

−− Pneumatic connection from starter valve solenoid to air/gas starter relay: 0.25” – 18
NPT

−− Starter valve solenoid outlet/exhaust with removable mufflers

• 12-cylinder: (qty 2) 0.25” NPT

• 16-cylinder: (qty 1) 0.25” NPT and (qty 1) 0.5” NPT)

• Customer-supplied electric starter:

−− Starting motor pad, for motors with SAE number 3 mounting flange

−− Electric power supply

−− “Freewheeling” diode across starter relay/solenoid

−− Wiring to ESM control

• See S-7232-422 for battery sizing

Disconnect all engine harnesses and electronically con-


trolled devices before welding on or near an engine. Failure
to comply will void product warranty.

The electrical interference from solenoids and other electrical switches will not be cy-
clic and can be as high as several hundred volts. This could cause faults within the ESM
system that may or may not be indicated with diagnostics. Waukesha requires a “free-
wheeling” diode (1N4002 or equivalent rated for 100V and 1A) be added across the coils of
relays and solenoids to suppress high induced voltages that may occur when equipment
is turned off. Failure to comply will void product warranty.

17 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Starting System Chapter 17

Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off


or the area is known to be non-hazardous.

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any electrical compo-


nents unless you are a technically qualified individual who is fa-
miliar with the electrical elements involved.

Starter Outlet
Starter Inlet

Starter solenoid
valve exhaust

Figure 17-1: Connection points for Waukesha-supplied pneumatic starter (12-cylinder)

17 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 17 Starting System
Always turn the battery charger off first, before discon-
necting the batteries. Then disconnect the battery nega-
tive (-) cable before beginning any repair work.

Table 17-1: Battery Cable Lengths for 24VDC Starting Motor Circuits

2 2

(C) (C)
2 2 (B)

3 3

(A) (B)
(A)
- -
+ +
4 4

1 - Typical Starting Motor Circuits 3 - Starting Motor


2 - Starting Motor Contactor 4 - Battery

SELECT SIZE OF CABLE FROM LISTING BELOW USING FIGURE POINTS A, B AND C ABOVE:
TOTAL CABLE LENGTH (A + B + C) USE SIZE OF CABLE
Less than 16 ft (4.9 m) #0
16 – 20 ft (4.9 – 6.1 m) #00
20 – 25 ft (6.1 – 7.6 m) #000
25 – 32 ft (7.6 – 9.8 m) #0000 or (2) #0
32 – 39 ft (9.8 – 11.9 m) (2) #00
39 – 50 ft (11.9 – 15.2 m) (2) #000
50 – 64 ft (15.2 – 19.5 m) (2) #0000
NOTE: Information based on 0.002 ohm total cable resistance for 24- or 32-volt systems. Consult factory if ambient
temperature is below 50°F (10°C) or above 120°F (49°C).
NOTE: When contactor is an integral part of starting motor, a bus connection is used. (A) + (B) will then be total cable
length.

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
L-08088-26 12-cylinder standard outline drawing

L-08088-24 12-cylinder GC-spec outline drawing

L8049-109 16-cylinder standard outline drawing

L8049-130 16-cylinder GC-spec outline drawing

L-08041-152 Accessory Drawing, 12-cylinder Elec. Starting w/ Elec. Prelube

L-08041-153 Accessory Drawing, 12-cylinder Elec. Starting w/ Air Prelube

L-08041-331 Accessory Drawing, 12-cylinder Air/Gas Starter

17 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Starting System Chapter 17
L8049-122 Accessory Drawing, 16-cylinder Single Air / Gas Starter - High or Low Pressure

L8049-123 Accessory Drawing, 16-cylinder Dual Air / Gas Starter - High or Low Pressure)

S-7447-08 Air volume and pressure guidelines for air starter

S-7232-422 Battery Specification

SYSTEM DESIGN
The starter(s) for the engine must be sized so that they are capable of rotating the engine
and driven equipment; different options and pressure ranges are available. The pneumatic
starters are integral designs which include a relay valve and strainer. In Gas Compression
applications, compressor bypass valves are typically used to unload compressors and make
the package easier to start. Documents for sizing the starter, torque output and air/gas con-
sumption are available in S-7447-08. This documents also contain information and equations
for sizing the air receiver if compressed air is being used.

Compressed air or high pressure gas can be used to spin the pneumatic starters. If a com-
bustible gas is used then the starter exhaust and solenoid exhaust/vent must be plumbed to
a safe location per applicable local codes and regulations. If compressed air is used and the
exhaust is not routed away from the engine, it should be directed to prevent personal injury.

Piping must be sized to provide the appropriate flow and pressure to the starters. Pressure
loss through the piping to the starters and restriction from the exhaust piping must be taken
into consideration. It is common to see up to a 30% pressure loss due to piping restriction. Us-
ing transition pieces and piping larger than the starter flange sizes can help reduce restriction
in the system for longer piping runs. Flex connections should be used at the inlet and outlet
of any engine connections.

AIR/GAS QUALITY
The starter does not require lubrication of the drive air/gas supply. The starters incorporate
sealed, greased packed lubrication of the gearbox and bearings, designed to be maintenance
free for the life of the starter. It is recommended to use a coarse (40 mesh [420 micron]) filter
in the supply stream of the air/gas in applications where larger particulate is abundant. The
most common damaging solid contaminants found in unfiltered air/gas supply are weld slag
or steel pipe shavings generally found in new installations or when piping has been modified.
The starter includes an internal piping screen to remove some debris; however this should not
be used for gross debris removal and an additional screen should be used to clean the piping
before commissioning. These starter motors will operate reliably on field quality (wellhead)
gas and “sour natural gas” (including gas that has H2S content as high as 6000 PPM). Liquids
in the supply stream will not damage the starter motors. The only detriment to operating on
air/gas supplies with high concentrations of liquids is freeze-up. Liquids which “pool” and
then freeze around rotating elements (turbine rotors) may restrict motor rotation until the
liquids are thawed.

17 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 17 Starting System

17 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
ESM Packaging Chapter 18

CHAPTER 18 - ESM PACKAGING


ESM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
• Proper supply power provided: – 24VDC with minimum voltage ripple

• Control panel to supply all input signals to ESM for control and operation of the engine

• Required connections to Customer Interface harness (6 wires minimum)

• Setup through ESP with laptop or local PC

• Alarm/shutdown logic through customer panel for non-ESM controlled shutdowns

• Connect to exhaust and main bearing thermocouples for temperature readings and
alarm/shutdown; these are not monitored by ESM

• Zener diode for all 4-20 mA input signals

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Standard engine

• ESM with AFR2

• HMI display panel

• 25ft harnesses

GC-Spec

• ESM with AFR2

• HMI display panel

• Exhaust thermocouples

• Main bearing thermocouples

• 50ft harnesses

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard engine

• Exhaust thermocouples

• Main bearing thermocouples

• 50ft or 200ft harness lengths

GC-Spec

• N/A

18 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 18 ESM Packaging

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


• 18-32VDC power source (battery preferred)

• Earth ground

• PLC logic for exhaust and main bearing thermocouples (if equipped)

The Waukesha ESM is a system designed to optimize engine performance and maximize up-
time. The ESM integrates spark timing control, speed governing, knock detection, start-stop
control, air-fuel ratio control, diagnostic tools, fault logging and engine safeties. In addition,
the ESM system has safety shutdowns such as low oil pressure, engine overspeed, high IMAT,
high coolant outlet temperature and uncontrolled knock.

The Engine Control Unit (ECU) is the central brain of the control system and main customer
interface. Interface with ESM is through 25 foot (7.6 m) harness to local panel, through MOD-
BUS RTU slave connection RS-485 multidrop hardware, and through the Electronic Service
Program (ESP). ESM meets Canadian Standards Association Class I, Division 2, A, B, C & D
(Canada & US) hazardous location requirements

See “Figure 18-1: ESM schematic” for a general overview of the ESM system inputs and out-
puts.

ignition coils 24 VDC


personal HMI MODBUS out
computer for customer

ignition power power electronic service


module w/diagnostics distribution box program
CAN
E CM

pre-catalyst air inlet


temperature temperature/
pressure/
post-catalyst humidity
temperature

CAN
pre-catalyst
intake manifold pressure
Local control pressure knock sensors FCV left and
(Local panel or PLC) right bank
post-catalyst
oil temperature
pressure
oil pressure
integrated throttle control intake manifold
• throttle actuator pre-catalyst O2
temperature left and right
• throttle position
camshaft pickup bank
• power electronics
water jacket
temperature post-catalyst O2
flywheel pickup
exhaust stack
temperature
Customer Supplied

Waukesha Supplied
MODBUS from ECU to ECM

CAN for shutdown request

Figure 18-1: ESM schematic

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
Form 6388-1 VHP Series Four 12-Cylinder w/AFR2/emPact Operation & Maintenance
Manual

Form 6398-1 VHP Series Four P9394GSI with AFR2 Operation & Maintenance Manual

Form 6295-5 ESM VHP Series Four Operation & Maintenance Manual

S-07232-422 Battery Specifications

18 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
ESM Packaging Chapter 18
REQUIRED CONNECTIONS

POWER SUPPLY
The ESM system requires a connection to a steady power source; 18 – 32 VDC and a peak-to-
peak voltage ripple of less than 2 volts. Batteries are the preferred method of supplying the
ESM system with clean, stable power. In addition, batteries have the advantage of continued
engine operation if there is a disruption in the source of electric power. See “Figure 18-2: Pow-
er supplied by batteries” for a wiring schematic.

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any electrical compo-


nents unless you are a technically qualified individual who is fa-
miliar with the electrical elements involved.

Disconnect all electrical power supplies before making any con-


nections or servicing any part of the electrical system.

Disconnect all engine harnesses and electronically con-


trolled devices before welding on or near an engine. Failure
to disconnect all engine harnesses and electronically con-
trolled devices will cause damage to electronic compo-
nents and void warranty.

Comply with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations for


procedures concerning proper battery use and maintenance.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid and generate explosive mixtures


of hydrogen and oxygen gases. Keep any device that may cause
sparks or flames away from the battery to prevent explosion.

Always wear protective glasses or goggles and protective clothing


when working with batteries. You must follow the battery man-
ufacturer’s instructions on safety, maintenance and installation
procedures.

Always turn the battery charger off first, before disconnecting


the batteries. Then disconnect the battery negative (-) cable
before beginning any repair work. Failure to turn battery
charger off before disconnecting the batteries may cause
electronic component damage and void warranty.

18 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 18 ESM Packaging

customer
controller

A
fuse

power
alt box distribution
box
+ - + -

1/2 in.
ground stud

alt engine crankcase

B
earth ground
2/0 awg min.

power (+) wired at Waukesha


power (+) not wired at Waukesha
ground (-) wired at Waukesha
ground (-) not wired at Waukesha
earth ground (-) not wired at Waukesha

Figure 18-2: Power supplied by batteries

Depending on the distance from the batteries or power supply, choose appropriate cable
diameters for ground and power wiring. The VHP engines have an average draw of 4.2 amps
with a maximum current draw of 12 amps. If the optional user power 24V FOR U is used it can
increase the current draw by a maximum of 5 amps. The batteries should be wired directly to
the 3/8 inch stud located in the Power Distribution Junction Box using the largest diameter
cable that is practical; 00 AWG is the largest the Power Distribution Box can accommodate.

Disconnect all electrical power supplies and batteries before mak-


ing any connections or servicing any part of the electrical system.

Do not install, set up, maintain or operate any electrical compo-


nents unless you are a technically qualified individual who is fa-
miliar with the electrical elements involved.

Equipment must be grounded by qualified personnel in accor-


dance with IEC (International Electric Code) and local electrical
codes.

18 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
ESM Packaging Chapter 18
The customer-supplied earth ground should be connected to the right side of the engine.
There is a ½”-13UNC-2B ground stud located just below the carburetor (12-cylinder), or just
to the right of the junction box (16-cylinder) and is readily accessible for this requirement. See
“Figure 18-3: Earth ground location (12-cylinder)”

Figure 18-3: Earth ground location (12-cylinder)

Figure 18-4: Earth ground location (16 cylinder)

18 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 18 ESM Packaging
CUSTOMER INTERFACE HARNESS
The electrical interference from solenoids and other electri-
cal switches will not be cyclic and can be as high as several
hundred volts. This could cause faults within the ESM that
may or may not be indicated with diagnostics. Waukesha requires a “freewheeling” diode
be added across the coils of relays and solenoids to suppress high induced voltages that
may occur when equipment is turned off. Failure to comply will void product warranty.

Customer electrical connections to the ECU are made through the Customer Interface Har-
ness. The unterminated end of the harness connects to the customer supplied panel. Some
connections of the Customer Interface Harness are required for ESM operation: Start Engine,
Normal Shutdown, Emergency Shutdown and 3 wires for speed controls. For more informa-
tion on the required connections, and the optional ones available, see “Appendix D: Customer
Interface Connections”.

A 1 inch diameter harness will be shipped loose with the engine which will have unterminated
wire ends for connecting inside the customer panel. This Customer Interface harness has a
Deutsch connector for connecting to the on engine harness. On the customer connection
side there is a 1” sealing ring and gland for connection to the customer control panel and this
harness has a maximum bend radius of 6”. The Customer Interface Harness must be properly
grounded to maintain CE compliance.

Waukesha currently provides suppression diodes for the prelube solenoid valve and starter
solenoid valves.

A Zener diode is required to prevent the ECU from becoming disabled when a current source
is powered before the ECU. The Zener diode should be a 6.2 volt, 1.0 watt Zener diode from (+)
to (–) across all 4 – 20 mA input signals (see Figure 4). This diode may be applied at the signal
source, such as an output card of a PLC, or at an intermediate junction box commonly used
where the Customer Interface Harness terminates.

Figure 18-5: Zener Diode (4-20mA Analog Inputs)

OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTIONS
Main bearing and exhaust thermocouples are standard equipment on the GC-spec engines
and optional on the standard engines.
Thermocouples can be used to monitor engine exhaust temperatures through the customer
control panel; the ESM does not monitor these temperatures. The 12-cylinder VHP engines
have 14 thermocouples, the 16-cylinder has 16 thermocouples. One thermocouple is provid-
ed for each of the cylinders and measures the exhaust temperatures within the respective
cylinder head exhaust port. There is also one pre-turbine thermocouple for each turbocharg-

18 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
ESM Packaging Chapter 18
er which is only intended to be used as a general indication of the relative exhaust tempera-
ture. These individual cylinder exhaust thermocouples and pre-turbine thermocouples are
not monitored by ESM.
One exhaust stack temperature sensor (post-turbine, pre-catalyst) on each turbo charger
is standard with the AFR2 system. These sensors are monitored by the ESM system with an
alarm fault if the temperature is too high.
See “Table 18-2: Harness construction” for harness construction information.
Main bearing temperature sensors – Type K sensors are also wired to a bulkhead so they can
be monitored through the customer control panel; these are not monitored by ESM. Alarm
and shutdown set points will need to be programmed into the customer logic; the recom-
mended shutdown temperature is 250F (121C). On the 12-cylinder VHP engines there are 7
main bearing temperature sensors and on the 16-cylinder there are 10 main bearing thermo-
couples. See “Table 18-2: Harness construction” for harness construction information.

LOCAL CONTROL CONNECTIONS


See “Table 18-1: Local control option harness loose wire identification” for the Local Control
harness wires. These connections are not required but may be helpful for certain applica-
tions. See Table 2 for harness construction information.

Table 18-1: Local control option harness loose wire identification

WIRE LABEL SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE WIRE COLOR FROM PIN WIRE SIZE SOCKET SIZE WIRE #
+24VFOR U User Power +24 VDC nominal RED W 18 16 1020
GND FOR U User Ground Ground BLK N 18 16 1120
ESTOP SW Emergency Stop Depends on hardware TAN E 18 16 1804
Switch, Normally wired to switch
Open
ESTOP SW Emergency Stop Depends on hardware TAN F 18 16 1802
Switch, Normally wired to switch
Open
GOVSD+24V Shutdown Switch +24 VDC nominal RED U 18 16 1010
Power
GOV SD+ Switch, Governor Shutdown input PUR H 18 16 1426
Actuator, G
PREL CTRL Customer Pre-Lube +24 VDC digital I/P BRN X 18 16 1679
Control
*WASTGAT+ Wastegate Alarm Shutdown PUR S 18 18 1436
PDB ALM PDB Alarm Over-Current WHITE P 18 18 1642
FUNCT Q Spare – WHITE Q 18 18 1643
FUNCT R Spare – WHITE R 18 18 1644

* WASTEGAT+ signal is not used on VHP engines. This is a function for 275GL+ engines only.)

18 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 18 ESM Packaging
Table 18-2: Harness construction

Harness Diameter Engine Side Customer Side Maximum


bend radius
Customer Interface 1" Deutsch connector Loose wires, 1" 6"
sealing gland
Local Control 0.75" Deutsch connector Loose wires, 0.75" 5"
sealing gland
Exhaust Thermocouple 1" Deutsch connector Loose wires, 1" 6"
sealing gland
Main Bearing Thermocouple 0.75" Deutsch connector Loose wires, 0.75" 5"
sealing gland

GOVERNOR CONNECTION
The governor actuator is always drawing power. If battery-powered ignition is being used,
power is being drawn from the battery even with the engine shut down. To remedy this, the
battery can be removed when not in use, or the battery can be placed in reduced power
mode, limiting the amount of power that will be drawn from the battery. The GOVSD+24V
and GOV SD+ wires of the local control option harness can be used as a way to reduce power
demand from the battery. Connecting GOVSD+24V and GOV SD+ with a 10 kΩ resistor will put
the actuator in a low current draw standby mode. NEVER connect GOVSD+24V and GOV SD+
with a 10 kΩ resistor while the engine is operating.

+24V FOR U AND GND FOR U


Never attempt to power the engine using the +24VFOR U wire
in the local control option harness. The +24VFOR U wire is for
customer use to provide 24 VDC power to other equipment.

Never attempt to power the engine using the +24VFOR U wire in the local control option har-
ness. The +24VFOR U wire is for customer use to provide 24 VDC power to other equipment.

Power (24 VDC, 5 amps maximum) is available for items such as a local control panel and
panel meters. The 24 VDC wires are labeled +24VFOR U and GND FOR U. DO NOT POWER THE
ENGINE THROUGH THIS CONNECTOR!

MODBUS
MODBUS is an industrial communication network that uses the master-slave topology.
Through this connection nearly every parameter that ESM is monitoring can be read by the
customer’s PLC. This includes temperatures, pressures, timing, engine speed, error codes etc.
See the O&M manual for more information.

Modbus RS-485 output is available through the customer interface harness as two wires
labeled RS 485A- and RS 485B+ (green and yellow, respectively).

ALARM AND SHUTDOWNS


ESM has alarm and shutdown setpoints built into its logic to help prevent engine damage or
unsafe operation. User signals can also be sent to ESM to perform a shutdown; Waukesha
recommends monitoring the main bearing and exhaust thermocouples to program alarm
and shutdowns.

“Table 18-3: Alarm and shutdown parameters” lists some of the normal operating parame-
ters as well as the respective alarm and shutdown setpoints.

18 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
ESM Packaging Chapter 18
Table 18-3: Alarm and shutdown parameters

Parameter Normal Alarm Shutdown


Jacket Water 180°F 205°F 215°F
Lube Oil Header Temp 180°F 195°F 205°F
Lube Oil Header Pressure 50-60 psi 35 psi 30 psi
Intake Manifold Temperature up to 140°F 150°F 155°F
Main Bearing Temperature* 250°F
Exhaust Temperature* 75°F above normal** Customer preference**
Overspeed 1200 rpm max 10% overspeed
Fuel Pressure* 30-60 psi 30 psi 25 psi
*logic supplied by customer

**Exhaust temperatures vary based on site conditions and load. Determine the average ex-
haust temperature at full load and speed, then set an alarm value 75°F above this. A shut-
down above the alarm can be used if required at the site.

Other shutdowns programed into ESM include the following:

• E-Stop buttons on each side of the engine

• Low oil pressure

• Engine overspeed

−− 10% overspeed instantaneous

−− Waukesha-calibrated to run no more than rated speed

−− User-calibrated driven equipment overspeed

• Customer-initiated emergency shutdown

• Engine overload (based on percentage of engine torque)

• Uncontrollable knock

• Overcrank

• Engine stall

• Failure of magnetic pickup

• Catalyst temperature or pressure limit exceeded

18 - 9 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 18 ESM Packaging

18 - 10 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Asset Performance Management Chapter 19

CHAPTER 19 - ASSET PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT (APM)


APM REQUIREMENTS
• Cellular network or internet connection on site to transmit data

• Access to myPlant to allow user to view APM data from laptop or smartphone

• APM Module must be located at least 3ft (1m) from the engine to avoid electro-magnetic
interference, and must be installed in an enclosure to keep safe from the environment
(rain, sunlight, dust, etc.)

• Requires 24VDC power source for APM module and optional cell router. 6VDC power re-
quired for optional cell booster

STANDARD EQUIPMENT
All VHP engines with ESM will come standard with the parts shown in Kit 1 shipped loose.
Note that these are sensitive electrical components and care should be taken to not allow the
shipped loose parts box to be exposed to the elements.

Table 19-1: Kit 1 Components

Item Description Quantity Part Number


APM Module Data Collector 1 741335
APM Installation Manual 1 FORM 10000-3
and Operation
Instructions

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
The data that is collected with the APM Module needs to be transmitted to GE’s secure data
storage. To do this GE offers different option codes depending on the location, which provides
a cell router, SIM card, and antenna. This kit is meant to connect the APM Module to the in-
ternet via a cellular connection to allow data transmissions to the APM user interface. Check
with application engineering to ensure suitability of the cell router in the specific country that
the package will be located.

This option is not needed if the site has an internet connection or an existing cellular network
is being used, refer to S-09209-1 for router performance requirements. A local area network
connection could also be used to transmit the data, but one of these options is required for
the system to function.

Table 19-2: Kit 2 Components

Item Quantity
Cell Router 1
SIM Card 1
Cellular Antenna 1
Antenna Magnetic Base 1

19 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 19 Asset Performance Management

There is an additional option (code 1022) for a cellular signal booster kit that is available for
North American customers who have poor cellular coverage. This booster can be ordered
for sites where APM Kit # 2 – cell router, does not provide adequate cell connection. The cell
booster must be installed outside of a Class 1, Div. 2 area. The kit includes:

Table 19-3: Kit 3 Components

Item Quantity Part Number


Directional Antenna 1 741290
Cell Booster 1 741074
50ft Coax Cable 1 741312

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT


The customer must supply a suitable location to mount the APM hardware to keep it safe
from exposure to the environment (rain, sunlight, dust, etc.). The APM Module and optional
cell router kit should be installed at least 3ft (1m) away from the engine in either the local
control panel or an additional junction box (NEMA 4/IP66 rated). Other miscellaneous hard-
ware for installation will be required, which may include Ethernet and/or serial cable as well
as power and ground wires for the devices as the lengths of these connections will be site
specific.

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Form 10000-3 APM Installation and Operation Instructions

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The GE Waukesha Asset Performance Management Module (APM Module) is a data collector
that allows collection of operational and site data from multiple sources. The collected data is
transferred to GE’s secure APM User Interface, called “myPlant”, for further data trending and
analysis. Collected data can be used to identify trends and fine tune maintenance actions to
reduce plant operating costs and keep assets running at optimal performance and availabil-
ity. The myPlant interface can be viewed from either a laptop or smartphone to allow users
access to their data 24/7 from anywhere, and allows trending of up to 2 years of historical
data. myPlant also offers analytics to allow better planned maintenance or a close watch on
any user defined parameter.

In addition to collecting operational data from the engine’s ESM, the APM Module can gather
operational data from the driven equipment and site balance of plant (BoP) data from the
site PLC. The APM system can aggregate data from multiple assets (compressor/generator,
ESM, AFR2, or PLCs) at the same time, using a Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP network. Up to 6
packages (engine + compressor/generator) and all related PLCs or site BoP can be connected
to one APM Module for stable data collection. One APM Module is needed for each duplicate
Modbus network that requires data collection (up to 6 packages per network).

19 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Asset Performance Management Chapter 19

Figure 19-1: APM System Flow Diagram

The APM Module and optional cell router are CSA Class 1, Div. 2 rated for hazardous environ-
ments. The APM Module has an IP20 rating, and it, along with the optional cell router, must
be mounted in an enclosure so they are not exposed to the environment (rain, sunlight, dust,
etc.).

Refer to Form 10000-3 – APM System Installation and Operation Instructions manual for
more information on mounting, installation, system configuration, and specific component
details and schematics.

19 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 19 Asset Performance Management

19 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Operation Chapter 20

CHAPTER 20 - ENGINE OPERATION


LIGHT LOAD OPERATION
The following information gives recommendations for special operation and maintenance
procedures when operating Waukesha natural gas engines at light loads or no loads for
extended periods of time.

Light load operation is typically defined as power levels less than 50% of the maximum con-
tinuous power rating. Gas engines usually have unstable combustion at light loads because
combustion chamber pressures are lower, which increases blow-by past the piston rings. This
can lead to contamination of the engine oil including an increase in oil nitration rates and
carboning of the piston ring grooves. Oil analysis is recommended to determine proper oil
change intervals. See latest edition of Service Bulletin 12-1880 for Waukesha oil recommen-
dations. Change intervals are usually not affected by periodic light loading.

If the engine is operated at less than 30% load for long periods (>300 hours), it is recommend-
ed that the engine be exercised at full load for 2 hours every 400 hours.

Engine oil and coolant temperatures should be maintained within the standard operating
ranges.

Always check thermostats for proper operation.

For further information regarding light load operation, refer to service bulletin 16-2864.

ENGINE STARTING
The following section describes the routine start-up sequence and procedure. For initial com-
missioning and pre-start procedures, refer to the Commissioning section of this manual.

STARTING REQUIREMENTS:
• Engines that are required to start at ambient temperatures below 50°F (10°C) require Lube
Oil and Jacket Water Heaters. Verify engine is warm enough before attempting to start.
Lube oil temperature range is 70°F - 100°F (21°C - 38°C). Jacket water temperature range
is 70°F - 125°F (21°C - 52°C)

• Intake air heater for effective starting when combustion air inlet temperature will be less
than 50°F (10°C) or for continuous operation if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-17.8°C).

NOTE: The ESM is calibrated by Waukesha to both alarm and shut down on low oil pressure.
However, low oil pressure alarm and shutdowns are inhibited for a period of time after engine
start. Follow these instructions for normal start-up of the engine.

20 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 20 Engine Operation

Always purge the engine and the exhaust system by cranking the
engine for several seconds before the ignition is turned on and the
main gas shutoff valves are opened.

The volume that is purged is several times greater than the vol-
ume of the exhaust system. This purge volume is approximately
the engine displacement for two revolutions.

In case the volume of the exhaust system is such that it will not be
purged by the cranking of the engine, the customer has to use an
alternative means to purge the exhaust system.

Only trained personnel should program the ESM.

STARTING PROCEDURE:
1. Complete all prestart activities and checks.

2. Reset all engine protection switches and devices.

3. Set operating speed to 750 rpm.

4. Confirm engine coolant and lube oil are at least 10°C (50°F) for reliable starting.

5. Open the manual gas shutoff valve, if closed. This statement refers to a customer-sup-
plied shutoff valve, located upstream of the engine. The ESM will automatically open the en-
gine-mounted shutoff valve at the appropriate time.

6. Initiate pre-lube/start cycle by activating the digital Start Signal to the ESM.

• Start Signal – a momentary “high” (8.6 – 36 volts; 24VDC nominal) input to the ECU indicat-
ing the engine should be started. The minimum duration of the signal is 1/2 second but
should not exceed 1 minute. The wire is labeled “START” and is located in the Customer
Interface Harness.

• The shutdown signals must both be “high” (8.6 – 36 volts; 24VDC nominal) in order to allow
the engine to start and run. This includes the Normal Shutdown (Run/Stop) digital input
(wire label “RUN/STOP”) and Emergency Shutdown digital input (wire label “ESD”). Both of
these wires are located in the Customer Interface Harness.

7. Engine should start in the first 7 – 8 seconds of cranking cycle. (A 5-second delay from
crank initiation to main gas shutoff valve opening is programmed into the ESM to purge un-
burned fuel from previous start attempts from the engine and fuel system.)

When the engine is started, listen carefully for any unusual noises. If a problem is suspected,
stop the engine immediately.

After the engine is started, verify that there are no gas, air, coolant or oil leaks. Pay special
attention to the gas manifolds and piping.

20 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Operation Chapter 20

NOTICE
If the oil pressure display does not indicate sufficient oil pressure within 15 seconds, shut
the engine down immediately. Never operate the engine without the proper oil pressure
indication.

If the engine has not reached the proper operating temperature of 76° – 82°C (170° –
180°F), the oil pressure could be as high as 758 kPa (110 psi). Once the engine has reached
the proper operating temperature, the oil pressure should meet the above specifications.

Never idle turbocharged engines for extended periods. Accumu-


lated carbon may damage turbocharger. Instead of idling the en-
gine, shut it down and restart when needed.

8. Warm engine by running with little or no load until oil pressure is 345 – 415 kPa (50 – 60 psi)
and jacket water temperature exceeds 38°C (100°F). For standby units, jacket water heating
to 43°C (110°F) is required.

9. Gradually apply load to avoid overloading engine. Refer to the following “Engine Loading”
section for further details.

ESM START SEQUENCE:


See “Figure 20-1: Start Flow Diagram”.

During the start sequence, the ESM performs the following steps:

• Prelubes engine (programmable from 0 – 10,800 seconds from the Prelube Time field lo-
cated on the [F3] Start-Stop panel)

• Engages starter motor (programmable rpm range using ESP software)

• Turns ignition on (after a user-calibrated purge time using ESP software)

• Turns main fuel on (programmable above a certain rpm and after a user-calibrated purge
time using ESP software)

• Turns prechamber fuel on (programmable above a certain rpm and after a user-calibrat-
ed purge time using ESP software)

When the user initiates a start from the user panel, a signal is sent to the ECU to begin the
start procedure. After receiving a start signal, and confirming the emergency stop and run/
stop signals are high, the ECU prelubes the engine for a user-calibrated period of time.

Once the prelube is complete, the starter is activated. The ignition is energized after the en-
gine has rotated through a minimum of two complete engine revolutions and a user-calibrat-
ed purge timer has expired. When the engine speed reaches an rpm determined by Wauke-
sha, the main gas shutoff valve is energized. After the engine speed exceeds a slightly higher
rpm, the prechamber main gas shutoff valve is energized at an rpm calibrated by Waukesha,
factoring in the value located in “Starter OFF RPM adj” field located on the [F3] Start-Stop
panel. The engine then increases speed until it reaches its governed rpm.

20 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 20 Engine Operation
Once the starter is activated, a timing circuit begins. If the engine does not reach a minimum
rpm within a calibrated amount of time, the ECU will initiate a shutdown and de-energize the
starter.

* CRANK TIME DEPENDS


START > 8.6V ON CALIBRATION
FOR LONGER
THAN 1/2 SECOND
IS CRANK TIME
< 30 SECONDS? * NO

IS ESD > 8.6V?


NO YES
YES

IS CRANK TIME
> ESP PURGE TIME AS IS CRANK TIME
IS RUN / STOP
PROGRAMMED ON [F3] > 30 SECONDS?*
START-STOP PANEL NO NO
> 8.6V? NO IN ESP?
YES YES
YES

IGNITION ENABLED
IS AN ESD
ACTIVE? YES
NO

IS RPM > 40 + ESP IS CRANK TIME


FUEL ON RMP ADJ?
NO > 30 SECONDS?*
NO
IS RED
MANUAL SHUTDOWN YES YES
SWITCH(ES) ON SIDE OF
ENGINE PRESSED? YES
FUELV = 24 VDC
(FUEL VALVE TURNED ON)

NO

IS RPM >
PMR = 24 VDC 300 RPM + ESP
(PRELUBE MOTOR STARTE R OFF RPM IS CRANK TIME
TURNED ON) PROGRAMMED ON [F3]
NO > 30 SECONDS?*
START-STOP PANEL NO
IN ESP?
YES
YES
IS
PMR “ON” TIME ASV = 0 VDC
> ESP PRELUBE TIME AS (STAR TER DISENGAGED)
PROGRAMMED ON [F3]
START-STOP PANEL NO
IN ESP?

ENGINE RUNNING PROCESS EMERGENCY


YES
SHUTDOWN DUE TO
ESD231 (OVERCRANK)
PMR = 0 VDC
(PRELUBE OFF)
SEQUENCE COMPLETE

See Emergency Stop


Flow Diagram
ASV = 24 VDC
(STARTER ENGAGED)

WIRE LABEL SHOWN IN BOLD

Figure 20-1: Start Flow Diagram

20 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Operation Chapter 20
ENGINE LOADING

COMPRESSION APPLICATIONS
In compression applications, a compressor bypass is used to apply the load to the engine,
which is designed to equalize the suction and discharge pressures on the compressor and
can minimize the load required from the engine for startup and warm-up. The bypass valve
must be completely open during engine startup and warm-up.

Loading of engine is accomplished by either ramping (timed) closure of bypass valve or


opening of suction valve depending on operating protocol of end-user. In either manner the
loading is continued over a period of time, while maintaining engine RPM within acceptable
drop limits. Once the unit has warmed up, load should be applied at a controlled ramp rate.
This rate is linear and should not exceed 20% of maximum rated load per minute (therefore
0-100% load can be achieved in 5 minutes).

The bypass line must be properly sized to minimize the compressor load during engine start-
up and warm-up. Typically a bypass line with a diameter equal to the discharge line is ideal
because it can accommodate all the flow from the compressor. A bypass line with a smaller
diameter will normally cause the engine to be started under a partial load. This will compro-
mise the durability of the starting system and internal components of the engine.

While a completely open bypass line will reduce the load required from the engine, there
may still be a small load applied to the engine if the compressor is not depressurized after
shutdown. While using a completely open bypass line, starting the engine does not require
depressurizing of the compressor unless otherwise required by the operating philosophy of
the customer’s compressor site.

Engine speed ramp rate is limited by ESM. The quickest speed change rate that ESM will allow
is 10 rpm per second.

POWER GENERATION APPLICATIONS


In Power Generation applications, the units are started and can be warmed up at either low
idle speed, or at synchronous speed (1000 or 1200rpm). With the circuit breaker open, there
is no load applied during warmup.

For units operating in parallel with the utility grid, once the unit has warmed up, load should
be applied at a controlled ramp rate. This rate is linear and should not exceed 20% of maxi-
mum rated load per minute (therefore 0-100% load can be achieved in 5 minutes).

For units in island mode operation (also known as stand-alone mode), the loading is deter-
mined by the sequencing/starting of individual site loads. In these cases, the maximum
allowable load steps for the 12-cylinder rich-burn engines are typically 50% of rated load.
Contact Waukesha Application Engineering for more details.

SHUTDOWN
The following section describes the routine and emergency shutdown procedures and se-
quences. A routine shutdown is the normal method use to stop the engine, whereas an emer-
gency shutdown should be used to avoid imminent personal injury or property damage.

20 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 20 Engine Operation
ROUTINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE:

Allow engine to cool for at least 10 minutes after shutdown. Do


not restart an overheated engine or an engine that has been shut
down by the engine protection system until the cause has been
determined and corrected.

Always ensure that the fuel gas valve(s) are closed after engine
shutdown.

NOTICE
If the engine is being shut down for an extended period of time, cap the exhaust pipe to
prevent moisture or contaminants from entering the engine.

1. Gradually reduce engine load.

2. Operate engine at no load for 5 minutes to cool down engine temperatures.

3. Shut down engine using customer-supplied control panel.

4. Postlube engine for 5 minutes for 12-cylinder engines and 10 minutes for 16-cylinder en-
gines. ESM system is programmed to automatically postlube engine.

ROUTINE SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE


See “Figure 20-2: Routine Stop Flow Diagram”.

To initiate a routine shutdown, the engine should be stopped by causing the normal stop (or
run/stop) input to go “low.” This turns off the fuel supply before ignition is halted, eliminating
unburned fuel. It runs the postlube procedure supplying oil to vital engine components. The
wire is found in the Customer Interface Harness and is labeled “RUN/STOP”. During this rou-
tine shutdown, the Emergency Shutdown input must remain active (high).

During the routine shutdown sequence, the ESM performs the following steps:

• Begins cooldown period (programmable using ESP software)

• Shuts off fuel (by closing the engine-mounted shutoff valve)

• Stops ignition when engine stops rotating.

• Postlubes engine (programmable from 0 – 10,800 seconds using the [F3] Start-Stop panel)

When the run/stop digital input to the ECU goes low (less than 3.3 volts), and a user-calibrated
cooldown period is met, the ECU stops the engine. This is accomplished by first de-energiz-
ing the main gas shutoff valve and prechamber main gas shutoff valve and then, when the
engine speed drops to zero, de-energizing the ignition. If the engine fails to stop in a prepro-
grammed period of time (typically less than 1 minute) after the main gas shutoff valve has
been de-energized, the ignition is de-energized, forcing a shutdown.

20 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Operation Chapter 20

RUN/STOP GOES
LOWER THAN 3.3V

HAS
COOLDOWN
TIMER EXPIRED AS
PROGRAMMED ON [F3]
START-ST OP PANE L NO
IN ESP?

YES
ACTUAT OR AUTO
CALIBRATION IF PMR = 24 VDC
PROGRAMMED ON (POST LUBE MOTOR
FUELV = 0 VDC [F4] GOVERNOR TURNED ON)
(MAIN FUEL VALV E PANEL IN ESP
TURNED OFF)

IS PMR
NO “ON” TIME
> ESP POSTLUBE TIME
NO HAS AS PROGRAMMED ON
IS ENGINE 30 SECOND [F3] START-STO P NO
SPEED = 0 RPM? TIMER EXPIRED? PANEL IN ESP?

YES YES

PMR = 0 VDC
ENG ALM GOES (POSTLUBE MOTOR
FROM OPEN CIRCUIT TURNED OFF)
TO 24 VDC

ECU RECORDS
ALM222
(MAIN FUEL VALV E)

SEQUENCE COMPLETE
IGNITION OFF

WIRE LABEL SHOWN IN BOLD

Figure 20-2: Routine Stop Flow Diagram

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE (ESD)


See “Figure 20-3: Emergency Stop Flow Diagram”.

Use an emergency shutdown to stop the engine to avoid imminent


personal injury or property damage. Never use an emergency
shutdown to stop the engine under normal circumstances, as this
may result in unburned fuel in the exhaust system which could
ignite.

An Emergency shutdown can be initiated in three ways:

1. An engine-mounted emergency pushbutton is activated

20 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 20 Engine Operation
2. Activating the ESD digital input signal:

• A digital signal input to the ECU that must be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36
volts) for the engine to run. If ESD goes open circuit, the engine performs an emergency
shutdown. The ESD wire connection can be found in the Customer Interface Harness.

NOTE: Do not use this input for routine stopping of the engine. After an emergency shutdown
and rpm is zero, ESD input should be raised to high to reset the ESM. If ESD input remains low,
ESM reset will be delayed and engine may not start for up to 1 minute.

3. The engine will perform an ESD if one of the ESM safety shutdowns are activated (over-
speed condition, low oil pressure, etc.).

ESD FAUL T

ECU PERFORMS
IMMEDIATE SHUTDOWN

IGNITION FUEL V GOES FROM


TURNED OFF 24 VDC TO 0 VDC

ENG ESD GOES FROM


OPEN CIRCUIT TO 24 VDC

ENG ALM GOES FROM


OPEN CIRCUIT TO 24 VDC

FAULT RECORDED IN ECU

SEQUENCE COMPLETE

POSTLUBE AND ACTUATOR AUTOCAL WILL NOT RUN


IF THE FOLLOWING CRITICAL ESD’S OCCUR:
ESD222 CUST ESD
ESD223 LOW OIL PRESS
ESD313 LOCKOUT/IGNITION

WIRE LABEL SHOWN IN BOLD

Figure 20-3: Emergency Stop Flow Diagram

20 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Engine Commissioning Chapter 21

CHAPTER 21 - ENGINE COMMISSIONING


Initial commissioning of the engine may take place at the project site or at the packager’s
facility. Prior to engine startup, there are checks, procedures, and initial setups which must
be performed to ensure the engine ready for startup.

This includes:

• checks of various mechanical and electrical components for proper operation

• initial fuel system adjustments

• ESM setup, using ESP software

Once the engine is initially started, there are additional items to perform including:

• Check for proper lube oil pressure and engine temperatures

• Verify engine status and parameters using ESP

• Listen for any potential problems

• Visually examine lines and components for signs of leaks, damage, or corrosion

• Continue with fuel system setup

The above information is intended to serve as reference. For further details and for actual
commissioning and startup of the engine, refer to the Operation Manual. Startup, testing,
and commissioning of engines should be performed only by qualified individuals.

21 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 21 Engine Commissioning

21 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Storage Chapter 22

CHAPTER 22 - STORAGE
STANDARD PRESERVATION
All Waukesha engines leave the factory with preservative oil which allows the engine to be
stored up to one year after shipment from the Waukesha factory with the capability of being
re-preserved to extend the preservation period. If the engine is stored outside or in harsh or
humid conditions, it may need to be preserved more frequently. Consider the following fac-
tors before deciding how much preservation is required:

• Whether the engine was used, the length of service since the last oil change

• The period of time the engine is likely to be idle or inoperative

• The atmospheric conditions at the time and place of storage. For example, the storage
problems encountered in a tidewater warehouse will differ greatly from those that may be
experienced in a dry and dusty location.

If caps from the engine connections have been removed for packaging or the engine has
been run for testing purposes then the engine must be re-preserved according to Waukesha
standards outlined in the latest revision of Service Bulletin 16-1855H.

NOTICE
Waukesha engines should be purged of all preservative oil from the cylinder head area
prior to start-up. Failure to comply with this message may result in engine damage.

NOTICE
Engines stored outdoors or in humid environments may require more frequent preser-
vations and inspections.

22 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 22 Storage

Engine preservative oils, such as Waukesha Preservative Oil, con-


tain a petroleum distillate which is harmful or fatal if swallowed.
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting. Consult a physician. If
vomiting occurs, keep head below hips to prevent aspiration of
liquid into lungs.

Avoid breathing of vapor. Vapor is harmful and may cause irrita-


tion to eyes, nose and throat. Use only with adequate ventilation.
If affected by exposure, move to fresh air immediately and get
medical help. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Use rubber gloves to
protect hands and chemical goggles to protect eyes. A National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) approved
respirator is required where ventilation is inadequate to protect
from inhaling vapors. If skin contact occurs, immediately wash
with soap and water. If eye contact occurs, flush eyes for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical help. Remove and wash
clothing before reuse.

Keep the preservative oil container closed and away from heat.
Always read and observe the safety labels on the container. Do
not remove or deface container labels.

Do not heat Waukesha Preservative Oil beyond 93°C (200°F). If


heating below 93°C (200°F), the container must be opened or vent-
ed to reduce the danger of explosion. Direct heating is dangerous
and must be avoided.

Do not heat preservative compounds to temperatures that exceed


93°C (200°F).

22 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Storage Chapter 22
EXTENDED PRESERVATION FOR NEW ENGINES
The purpose of the deferred engine start-up is to maintain Waukesha’s Express Limited War-
ranty on an engine which will be stored longer than 12 months from the factory shipment
date. The engine may be preserved beyond the one year period by contacting an authorized
Waukesha Distributor. Waukesha gas engines will allow two (2) deferred start-up requests:
the first after one (1) year from the factory ship date and the second two (2) years after the
factory ship date. Only an authorized Waukesha Distributor can perform the deferred start-
up process. Deferred start-up inspection and preservation instructions can be found in the
most current version of Service Bulletin 16-1855.

PRESERVATIVE OIL
Waukesha Preservative Oil offers a practical and economical solution to the problems pre-
viously mentioned. While similar in appearance to SAE 10 lubricating oil, it contains corro-
sion-inhibiting chemicals. These chemicals vaporize slowly and diffuse throughout an en-
closed area, forming an invisible protective layer on the exposed surfaces. All engine outlets
must be sealed to block the escape of the vaporized corrosion-inhibiting chemicals.
Waukesha preservative oil will protect the engine during storage for up to one year when
applied correctly; refer to the current version of Service Bulletin 16-1855.
When an engine is ready to be taken out of storage and put into operation or tested the spark
plugs must be removed and the engine cranked over to evacuate the combustion chambers
of any preservative oil.

22 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 22 Storage

22 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 23

CHAPTER 23 - MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS


WORK PLATFORMS
Work platforms should be installed on both sides of the engine to allow access to compo-
nents on the top of the engine. The platforms should be made large enough to allow an
individual to easily perform any required maintenance. Follow local codes and regulations for
the use of work platforms, railings, and ladders.

Figure 23-1: Engine Work Platform

Work platforms and ladders can also be installed to allow easy access to the catalyst ele-
ments to provide service.

Figure 23-2: Engine Work Platform and Ladder for Access to Catalyst Element in Exhaust

23 - 1 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 23 Maintenance Considerations

COMPONENT WEIGHTS
Refer to Component Weights for approximate weights of engine components. Use this table
to determine the size of the overhead crane required to do maintenance on site. The heavi-
est engine part that needs to be removed for a top end overhaul is the cylinder head which
weighs approximately 195 lb. (89 kg). For other routine maintenance, there are heavier com-
ponents. Refer to “Table 23-1: Component Weights”.

Table 23-1: Component Weights

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
ITEM DESCRIPTION 12-Cylinder 16-Cylinder
lb kg lb kg
Air/Gas Starter 64 30 64 0
Air Duct 53 24 499 226
Cam Follower Housing 250 113
Camshaft Cover 198 90 198 90
Camshaft Gear 32 15 74 33
Camshaft 114 52 163 74
Carburetor 24 11 26 12
Cover, Gear 161 73
Connecting Rod Assembly 62 28 62 28
Crankcase w/Main Bearing Caps/Studs/Nuts, Machined 4,965 2,252 7180 3257
Crankshaft Assembly 1,828 829 2350 1066
Cylinder Head 195 89 195 89
Cylinder Liner (Sleeve) 63 28 63 28
Damper 303 137 303 137
Header Water Inlet 272 123
Housing, Gear 263 119 303 137
Housing, Flywheel, Front Section 202 97
Housing, Flywheel, Rear Section 107 49
Flywheel w/Ring Gear 878 398 900 408
Gear Housing Assembly 274 124
Idler Gear 27 12 42 19
Intercooler, without Bracket or Piping 389 177 640 290
Intercooler Assembly w/ Bracket 423 192
Manifold, Exhaust 92 42 926 420
Manifold, Intake 86 39 163 74
Manifold, Water 102 46 359 163
Oil Cooler 225 106 366 166
Oil Cooler w/ Support Brackets 350 156
Oil Filter 29 13 29 13
Oil Filter Base 124 56 201 91
Oil Pump 123 56 155 70
Oil Pan, Deep Sump 2,474 1,122 4,205 1,907
Piston 33 15 33 15
Piston Pin 12 6 12 6
Pulley, Rear Crankshaft 81 37 81 37
Regulator, Gas (Fisher) 115 52 78 35

23 - 2 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 23
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
ITEM DESCRIPTION 12-Cylinder 16-Cylinder
lb kg lb kg
Shipping Skid 466 211 4081 1851
Stub Shaft Assembly 234 106
Turbocharger 67 30 264 120
Water Pump, Jacket Water 101 46 101 46
Water Pump, Auxiliary Water 61 28 62 47

MAINTENANCE CLEARANCES
The recommended minimum spacing between engines is 36 in. (914 mm) and between an
engine and a building wall is 36 in. (914 mm). This distance allows a worker to perform re-
quired maintenance on the engines when given the required spacing between engines and
from a building wall. When performing maintenance, allowing adequate space between en-
gines and walls is encouraged to ease maintenance procedures.

The recommended minimum overhead clearance is 60 in. (1524 mm). This measurement is
the distance from the crankshaft centerline required to remove the power cylinder parts (cyl-
inder head, piston, connecting rod, and cylinder liner). Additional clearance is then required
for the lifting device and any tools or straps for connecting the crane hood to the engine
component being removed. This additional clearance will vary per the equipment being used.

PACKAGE DESIGN
Placing the engine and driven equipment underneath a roof or inside a building can help
protect the engine from the environment and give maintenance personnel a more suitable
environment for working. Buildings or walls can also be used for sound attainment if local
regulations impose limits on sound levels.  Any structure erected around the engine should
be designed with consideration given to maintenance and operation tasks.

Whether a building will be constructed around the engine or the engine will be installed into
an existing building there should be easy access to remove the engine and driven equipment
for maintenance purposes and major overhauls. Having a large enough door or removable
wall will help facilitate removal of the equipment.  If a removable wall design is used the
amount of piping or equipment running through, or connected to, the wall should be mini-
mized to make this process easier.

Building ventilation is required to maintain a suitable temperature inside the building and
provide enough air to the intake filters if they are mounted inside.  Wherever they are mount-
ed there should be easy access to the filters for maintenance purposes.  The engine room
temperature should not exceed 65°C and the temperature to the intake filters should be be-
low 38°C or the maximum engine output will be reduced.  For these situations it is usually
beneficial to remotely mount the filters or duct air from outside the building.  Precautions
must be taken so that warm air is not recirculated into the intake.  Common heat sources are
from engine exhaust, radiators or coolers, building ventilation and heat from generator fans.

Exhaust silencers are often mounted on top of coolers, buildings or support structures. The
building should be designed to support any auxiliary equipment that will be mounted on it.  Ex-
haust systems should be configured so prevailing winds do not recirculate exhaust gases back
towards the engine and so the sound level and exhaust stack emissions meet local regulations.

23 - 3 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 23 Maintenance Considerations
TYPICAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 23-2: Typical Service Schedule

Engine Model Top End Overhaul Hours Bottom End Overhaul Hours
L5794GSI 25,000 50,000
L7042GSI S4 32,000 64,000
L7044GSI 22,000 44,000
P9394GSI 24,000 48,000

Table 23-3: Typical Maintenance Schedule

Bottom End Overhaul


Daily (or as required)

Top End Overhaul


12000 Hours
2000 Hours

3000 Hours

4000 Hours

8000 Hours
500 Hours

720 Hours
ITEM SERVICE
Air Cleaner Filter Element Check/Clean or Replace •
Pre-Lube Motor Lubricator (if equipped) Check/Fill •
Cooling Systems Fluid Level (Jacket and Auxiliary) Check/Fill •
Crankcase Oil Level Check/Fill •
ESP Fault History (If active alarms) Review (Monthly)

Engine Oil Analysis

ESP Total Fault History Review (Monthly) •
Auxiliary Water Pump Lubricate •
Idler Pulley Bearings (both Jacket & Auxiliary
Pumps)
Lubricate

Spark Plugs Replace •
Ignition Coils Inspect, replace o-ring as needed •
Spark Plug Extensions Inspect, replace rubber boot and
o-ring as needed

Belts - JW & AW pumps, and alternator (if
equipped)
Check/adjust

Crankcase Pressure Check per crankcase breather
system maintenance

Engine Oil and Filter* (3,000 hours or annually,
whichever comes first) for ISO Standard or
Change Oil and Filter

Continuous Duty with Extender Package,
Microspin, High Capacity Oil Pan w/o analysis)
Oil Cooler* (Oil Side) (Maintain with appropriate oil
change interval)
Drain

Oil Separator* (Microspin) (Maintain with
appropriate oil change interval)
Clean per lubrication system
maintenance

Magnetic Plugs (turbo & rocker arm) Clean per lubrication system
maintenance

23 - 4 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 23

Bottom End Overhaul


Daily (or as required)

Top End Overhaul


12000 Hours
2000 Hours

3000 Hours

4000 Hours

8000 Hours
500 Hours

720 Hours
ITEM SERVICE
Oxygen Sensors (with AFR2 or emPact options
only)
Replace**

Gas Regulator Filter Clean/Replace per fuel system
maintenance

Cooling Water Analysis Check

Engine Protection Devices Test and Calibrate**

Valve Clearance Adjust per valve adjustment
procedure and specification

Cylinder Compression (align w/ spark plug change) Check

Knock Sensors Inspect for dirt/grit, connector wear
and corrosion

Turbocharger (12-cylinder) Clean/Inspect per turbocharger
maintenance

Cooling System (Jacket and Auxiliary), if no
analysis program
Clean and Flush

Crankcase Oil Pickup Screen (low capacity oil pan
only)
Clean

Engine Mounting and Alignment Check

Exhaust Backpressure Check

Throttle Actuator Linkage Inspect, Lubricate, Test (as needed)

ESM (& emPact, if equipped) System Wiring Visually Inspect Wire Harnesses,
Secure Connections, Check Ground

Connections, Verify Incoming Power
is Within Specification
IPM-D Timing Disc/Pick-Up Clean/Inspect

Auxiliary Water/Coolant Hoses Inspect/Replace as necessary

Oil Pan Clean

Intercooler (Air-Side) Clean/Inspect

Carburetor Air/Gas Valve Inspect/Replace as necessary

Carburetor Diaphragm Replace

Carburetor Gasket Replace

All belts (Engine) Inspect/Replace

Crankcase Pressure Relief Valves, if equipped Inspect

Crankcase Breather Element Replace

Breather Check Valve Clean/Inspect

23 - 5 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 23 Maintenance Considerations

Bottom End Overhaul


Daily (or as required)

Top End Overhaul


12000 Hours
2000 Hours

3000 Hours

4000 Hours

8000 Hours
500 Hours

720 Hours
ITEM SERVICE
Wastegate Rebuild

Catalyst (emPact options), if equipped Inspect, Clean (as needed)

Crankcase Pressure Regulator Valve Rebuild (replace diaphragm &
o-rings)

Turbocharger (16-cylinder) Clean/Inspect per turbocharger
maintenance

Cylinder Heads Rebuild

Crankshaft Inspect

Conn Rod Inspect/Replace

Bearing, Idler Pulley Replace

Plunger, Relief Valve Replace

Bushing, Oil Pump Gear Replace

Spring, Relief Valve Replace

Jacket Water Thermostat Replace

Rod Bearing Asm. Replace

Bearing, Gov. Rod End Replace

Spindle, Idler Gear Replace

Bearing, Idler Gear - Front Replace

Spindle, Oil Pump Gear Replace

Cylinder Liner Replace

Oil Pump Rebuild

Bushing, Piston Pin Replace

Auxiliary Water Pump Rebuild

Bearing, Main Replace

Camshaft Bushing Replace

Bearing, Connecting Rod Replace

Auxiliary Water Thermostat Replace

Jacket Water Pump Rebuild

Push Rod Assembly Replace

23 - 6 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 23

Bottom End Overhaul


Daily (or as required)

Top End Overhaul


12000 Hours
2000 Hours

3000 Hours

4000 Hours

8000 Hours
500 Hours

720 Hours
ITEM SERVICE
Lube Oil Thermostat Replace

Tappet Asm, Valve Replace

Damper, Vibration Replace

Camshaft Inspect

Bearing, Idler Gear - Rear Replace

* Because of ongoing evaluation and continual updates to Waukesha’s oil recommendations, see the latest edition of Waukesha
Lube Oil Recommendations S1015-30 in Technical Data

** Local regulations may require more frequent maintenance

EMERGENCY SPARES
An emergency spares list is available upon request. Please contact application engineering
or local sales representative.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Waukesha has developed various special tools which have been designed to simplify per-
forming maintenance on a VHP engine.

Table 23-4: Special Tools for VHP


L7042GSI S4

P9394GSI
L5794GSI

L7044GSI

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION


X X X X 494217 COMPRESSION TESTER/ADAPTER
X X X X 494287 VALVE ADJUSTING WRENCH
X X X X 494385 SEAL REMOVER TOOL
X X X X 474034 VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR
X X X X 474038 VALVE SEAT EXTRACTOR
X X X X 474040 VALVE BRIDGE GUIDE TOOL
X X X X 474046 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
X X X X 495327 VALVE STEM SEAL INSTALLER
X X X X 495328 INTAKE VALVE SEAT INSTALLER
X X X X 495329 EXHAUST VALVE SEAT DRIVER
X X X X 495330 BRIDGE GUIDE PIN DRIVER
X X X X 474044 VALVE GUIDE STRAIGHTNESS GAUGE
X X X X 474000 CAMSHAFT DUMMY GEAR
X X X X 474005 STOP SLEEVE
X X X X 474013 WATER PUMP KIT

23 - 7 Form 10026-4
© 2017 General Electric Company
Chapter 23 Maintenance Considerations

L7042GSI S4

P9394GSI
L5794GSI

L7044GSI
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
X X X X 474025 CAM BEARING ROLLOUT TOOL
X X X 474041 9-3/8 IN. PISTON RING EXPANDER
X 474042 8-1/2 IN. PISTON RING EXPANDER
X 494085 8-1/2 IN. BORE RING COMPRESSOR
X X X 494206 9-3/8 IN. BORE RING COMPRESSOR
X 494284 8-1/2 IN. SLEEVE PLATE
X X X 494286 9-3/8 IN. SLEEVE PLATE
X X X X 494366 MAIN BEARING ROLL-OUT TOOL (T-DRILLED)
X X X X 499233 CYLINDER SLEEVE REMOVAL KIT
X X X X 495350 SPARK PLUG SLEEVE SEAT RESURFACER
X X X 474018 VHP GAS PISTON PULLER – 9-3/8 IN. BORE
X 474019 VHP GAS PISTON PULLER – 8-1/2 IN. BORE

NOTE: Hand Tool Kit 494261 is recommended as the best method to obtain the needed hand
tools and torque wrenches.

23 - 8 Form 10026-4
©2017 General Electric Company
Appendices

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A
CALCULATIONS FOR COOLANT PIPING RESTRICTION
1. Calculate coolant velocity (V) in pipe.

Equation 2
3
Flow(ft /min) 1000x Flow(L/sec)
V (FPM) = 2
or V(m/sec)= 2
Pipe inside area(ft ) Pipe inside area(mm )

3 3
Flow (ft /min) =Flow(GPM) * 0.1247(ft /gallon) or
3
m /hr
Flow (L/sec) =Flow
3.6
2
Pipe Area (ft )= {Diameter (inch)} * ʌ /4*0.00694 ft /inch
2 2 2

2 2
Pipe Area (mm ) = ʌ /4*{Diameter(mm)}

Table A-1: Pipe areas for standard pipe

PIPE SIZE ID (inch) ID (mm) AREA (inch2) AREA (mm2) AREA (ft2)
(inch)
1.5 1.61 40.894 2.04 1312.77 0.0142
2 2.067 52.502 3.36 2163.80 0.0233
2.5 2.344 59.538 4.32 2782.61 0.030
3 3.068 77.927 7.39 4767.03 0.0513
4 4.026 102.260 12.73 8208.89 0.0884
5 5.047 128.194 20.01 12900.42 0.139
6 6.065 154.051 28.89 18629.39 0.201
8 7.981 202.717 50.03 32259.06 0.347

2. Determine pressure loss (PL) per 100 ft. or meter of pipe for the velocity and pipe size from
“Figure A-1: Piping Restriction Chart”.

A-1 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-1: Piping Restriction Chart

3. Determine the equivalent pipe length (EPL) for all fittings:

“Figure A-2: Equivalent pipe length of fittings” gives equivalent pipe length in feet or meters
for various pipe fittings. Sum the EPL’s and add them to the total length of straight pipe to
find the total EPL.

4. Calculate the total piping restriction (RP):

Equation 3

PL (psi) PL (mbar)
RP = x EPL(ft) or x EPL(m)
100ft m

5. Calculate the total cooling circuit restriction:

Equation 4

RT = RP + RE + RR

Where

RT = total restriction (psi)

RP = piping restriction (psi)

RE = engine restriction (psi)

RR = radiator/heat exchanger restriction (psi)

A-2 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

From Crane Co. Technical Paper No. 409. Data based on the above chart are satisfactory for most applications.
REPRINTED WITH PERMISSION OF CRANE VALVE GROUP.

Figure A-2: Equivalent pipe length of fittings

A-3 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
CALCULATIONS FOR FUEL PIPING RESTRICTION
1. Determine fuel consumption (Btu/hr or kW) for the highest speed and load condition ex-
pected. This information is available in the Ratings and Standards section or Heat Rejection
section of the Waukesha Tech Data Manual. If working with the Brake Specific Fuel Con-
sumption “BSFC” (Btu/hp-hr) then multiply this figure by the maximum horsepower to get fuel
consumption in Btu/hr.

Equation 1
FuelConsumption(Btu/hr)=BSFC(Btu/hp-hr) xBHP
or
KJ kW
on(kW)=
FuelConsumptio x
kW/hr 3600

2. Determine the flow volume at standard temperature (60° F) and pressure (29.92” HG) with
the following formula:

Equation 2
3 Fuel consumption (Btu/hr)
Standard Flow (ft / min) y 60
Fuel SLHV (Btu/SCF SLHV)
or

3 Fuel consumption (kW)


StandardFlow (nm /hr)= 3
Fuel SLHV (KJ/nm )

3. Determine the flow volume at the site supply temperature and pressure:

Equation 3
o
14.7 [psia] x (460 [R] +Tsup )
Fsup =Fstd x o
(14.7 [psia] +Psup ) x 520 [R]
or
101.3 kPa x (273+Tsup )
ACTUAL FLOW (m3 /s)=
(101.3 kPa+Psup ) x 273

Table A-2: Pipe areas for schedule 40 pipe

PIPE SIZE ID (inch) ID (mm) AREA (inch2) AREA (mm2) AREA (ft2)
(inch)
1” 1.049 26.644 0.864 557.42 0.00600
1.25” 1.380 35.53 1.496 965.16 0.01039
1.5” 1.610 40.894 2.04 1312.77 0.0142
2” 2.067 52.502 3.36 2163.80 0.0233
2.5” 2.344 59.538 4.32 2782.61 0.030
3” 3.068 77.927 7.39 4767.03 0.0513
4” 4.026 102.260 12.73 8208.89 0.0884
5” 5.047 128.194 20.01 12900.42 0.139
6” 6.065 154.051 28.89 18629.39 0.201

A-4 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-3: Restriction Vs. Velocity for pipe diameters up to 6 inches.

Where
3 3
Fstd = Flow at standard conditions (ft /min or Nm /sec)
3 3
Fsupp = Flow at supply conditions (ft /min or Nm /sec)
o o
Tsup = supply temperature ( F or C)
Psup = supply pressure (psig or kPa)

4. Calculate fuel velocity (V) based on the supply flow Fsup for each pipe size used:

Equation 4
3
Fsup (ft /min)
V (FPM)= 2
or
Pipe inside area (ft )
3
Fsup (m /sec) x 1,000,000
V (m/sec)= 2
Pipe inside area (mm )
2 2 2 2
Pipe Area (ft )=[Diameter (inch)] x › /4 x 0.00694 ft /inch

Inside diameter and area for common pipe sizes are given in “Table A-2: Pipe areas for sched-
ule 40 pipe”.

As a general rule gas velocities over 12,000 FPM (60 m/s) are unacceptable because of the
high resulting restriction.

5. Determine pressure loss PL per 10 ft or 1 meter of pipe for each velocity and pipe size from
“Figure A-3: Restriction Vs. Velocity for pipe diameters up to 6 inches.”
A-5 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
6. Determine the equivalent pipe length (EPL) for all fittings of each pipe size.

“Figure A-2: Equivalent pipe length of fittings” gives equivalent pipe length in feet for various
pipe fittings. For each pipe size, sum the EPLs and add them to the total length of straight pipe
of that size to find the total of each pipe size.

7. Calculate the fuel gas corrected specific gravity:

Equation 5
o
(14.7 [psia] +Psup ) x 520 [R]
SGC =SG x o
or
14.7 [psia] x (460 [R] +Tsup )
(101.3 [kPa] +Psup ) x (273)
SGC =SG x
(101.3 x (273+Tsup ))

Where

SGc = specific gravity corrected for pressure and temperature

SG = fuel specific gravity

Natural Gas SG ≈ 0.6

600 Btu Digester Gas SG ≈ 0.9

400 Btu Landfill Gas SG ≈ 1.1

Field Gas SG ≈ 0.6 to 1.0

HD-5 Propane SG ≈ 1.5

Tsup = supply temperature (°F or °C)

Psup = supply pressure (psig or kPa)

8. Calculate the total piping restriction RP for each pipe size:

Equation 6
RP1 = PL1 (" wc /10 ft) x SGC x EPL(ft) or PL1 (mbar/m) x SGC x EPL (m)

9. Calculate the total fuel piping restriction:

Equation 7

RT = RP1 + RP2 + RP3+ RA

Where

RT = total restriction (“ wc or mbar)

RP1,2,3 = piping restriction for various pipe sizes (“ wc or mbar)

RA = accessories (filters, solenoid valves, etc.) restriction (“ wc or mbar)

A-6 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
CALCULATIONS FOR INDUCTION AIR PIPING RESTRICTION
Determine maximum engine inlet airflow at site conditions:

Actual airflow = SCFM x (Tsite + 460 / Tstd + 460)

Determine the equivalent pressure loss using “Figure A-4: Presssure loss vs. airflow”, “Figure
A-5: Presssure loss vs. airflow”, and “Figure A-6: Presssure loss vs. airflow”.

Determine the Equivalent Duct Length (EDL) from “Table A-4: Equivalent Pipe Length Of Fit-
tings In Feet (Meter)” and Table A-5 for each applicable component from step 2.

Calculate the pressure loss (PL) for each applicable components in the air induction system
from step 2 and 3.

PL = PL/L * EDL

Determine the total pressure loss for miscellaneous components such as piping bellows, air
cleaners, etc.

Calculate the total air induction system restriction by adding the PL for each component and
miscellaneous components

Verify that the total restriction does not exceed the maximum permissible restriction, includ-
ing a 30% reserve. If the restriction is too high, redesign the system to reduce the restriction
such as using larger diameter piping, or reducing the amount of flow reducing components
such as elbows.

Table A-3: ANSI schedule 40 pipe dimensions

ANSI PIPE ID (inch) ID (mm) AREA (inch2) AREA (mm2) AREA (ft2)
DIAMETER
1.5” 1.61 40.894 2.04 1312.77 0.0142
2” 2.067 52.502 3.36 2163.80 0.0233
2.5” 2.344 59.538 4.32 2782.61 0.030
3” 3.068 77.927 7.39 4767.03 0.0513
4” 4.026 102.260 12.73 8208.89 0.0884
5” 5.047 128.194 20.01 12900.42 0.139
6” 6.065 154.051 28.89 18629.39 0.201
8” 7.981 202.717 50.03 32259.06 0.347
10” 10.02 254.508 78.85 50847.84 0.5476
12” 12 304.800 113.1 72928.89 0.7854
14” 13.25 336.550 137.9 88913.73 0.9575
16” 15.25 387.350 182.7 117781.42 1.268
18” 16.88 428.752 223.7 144305.20 1.553
20” 18.81 477.774 278.0 179190.38 1.931
22” 21.00 533.400 346.4 223344.71 2.405
24” 22.60 574.040 401.2 258674.71 2.786

A-7 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-4: Presssure loss vs. airflow

Figure A-5: Presssure loss vs. airflow

A-8 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-6: Presssure loss vs. airflow

Table A-4: Equivalent Pipe Length Of Fittings In Feet (Meter)

ROUND PIPE DIAMETER


FITTINGS 3” 4” 5” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16” 18” 20” 24”
d/D=1/4 3.5 4.9 6.3 7.9 11.2 14.5 18.3 20.6 24.3 29.7 31.9 39
Flanged (1) (1.5) (1.9) (2.4) (3.4) (4.4) (5.6) (6.3) (7.4) (9.1) (9.7) (11.9)
d 15Û D
d/D=1/2 2.4 3.3 4.3 5.4 7.6 9.9 12.5 14.0 16.5 20.3 21.7 27
Flanged (0.7) (1) (1.3) (1.6) (2.3) (3) (3.8) (4.3) (5) (6.2) (6.6) (8.2)
15° Diffuser*
EPL based on d/D=3/4 1.1 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.6 4.6 5.8 6.6 7.8 9.5 10.2 13
flow at “d” Flanged (0.3) (0.5) (0.6) (0.8) (1.1) (1.4) (1.8) (2) (2.4) (2.9) (3.1) (4)
d/D=1/4 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.1 4.3 5.5 7.0 7.7 8.8 10.7 11.9 14.4
Flanged (0.4) (0.5) (0.7) (0.9) (1.3) (1.7) (2.1) (2.3) (2.7) (3.3) (3.6) (4.4)
D 15Û d
d/D=1/2 1.0 1.4 1.9 2.5 3.5 4.4 5.6 6.2 7.0 8.6 9.6 11.5
Flanged (0.3) (0.4) (0.6) (0.8) (1.1) (1.3) (1.7) (1.9) (2.1) (2.6) (2.9) (3.5)
15° Diffuser*
EPL based on d/D=3/4 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 2.0 2.5 3.3 3.6 4.1 5.0 5.6 6.7
flow at “D” Flanged (0.2) (0.2) (0.3) (0.4) (0.6) (0.8) (1) (1.1) (1.2) (1.5) (1.7) (2)

(Calculated using NTIS Handbook Of Hydraulic Assistance, Form AEC-TR-6630)

A-9 Form 10026-3


©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Table A-5: Equivalent Pipe Length Of Fittings In Feet (Meter)

ROUND PIPE DIAMETER


FITTINGS 3” 4” 5” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16” 18” 20” 24”
d

90Û
34.7 43.7 49.1 58.1
Flanged ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
d
D = 1.4 d
(10.6) (13.3) (15) (17.7)
Y-Connection
based on flow at “d”

D 15Û d
Bell 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.0 4.7 5.3 6.1 7.6
mouth
inlet (0.2) (0.3) (0.4) (0.5) (0.7) (0.9) (1.1) (1.2) (1.4) (1.6) (1.9) (2.3)
15° Diffuser*
EPL based on
flow at “D”

Square 9.5 13.0 16.0 23.0 29.0 35.0 40.0 47.0 53.0 61.0 76.0
mouth 6.7 (2)
inlet (2.9) (4) (4.9) (7) (8.8) (10.7) (12.2) (14.3) (16.2) (18.6) (23)

* Minimum restriction is with a 6° diffuser. EPL with a 6° diffuser is approximately 1/2 the EPL of a 15° diffuser.

A - 10 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
EXHAUST PIPING THERMAL GROWTH CALCULATION
NOTES:

1. Allow for thermal expansion of the exhaust pipe beyond the engine exhaust flex connec-
tion. The Waukesha exhaust flex (when supplied) will accommodate engine thermal expan-
sion but cannot tolerate movement imposed by external thermal growth. Insulated pipes will
run hotter and consequently expand more.

COEFFICIENT OF EXPANSION Ce

-6 in -5 mm
Steel 6.5 x 10 o
(1.17 x 10 o
)
in F mm C

-6 in -5 mm
Stainless Steel 9.9 x 10 o
(1.7 x 10 o
)
in F mm C

Thermal expansion can be calculated with the following formula:

Equation 1

L e = Ce *L *(Texh -Tstnd )/100

WHERE:
L e = Length of pipe expansion (inches or meters)
o o
Ce = Coefficient of expansion for the material (in/in/ F or mm/mm C)
L = Piping length at standard conditions (inches or meters))
o o
Texh = Exhaust Temperature ( F or C)
o o
Tstnd = Standard Temperature ( F or C)

A - 11 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
EXHAUST PIPING RESTRICTION CALCULATION
1. Determine exhaust volume flow rate (ft3/min or m3/hr) for the specific engine model from
the heat rejection sections in the Technical Data Manual. If exhaust flow is given in terms of
mass flow, a conversion is available in the notes section of the heat balance.

2. Calculate exhaust velocity (V) for each pipe size used:

Equation 2
3
Flow (ft /min)
V (FPM) = 2
Pipe inside area (ft )
or
3
Flow (m /hr)
V (m/sec) = 277.8 x 2
Pipe inside area (mm )
2 2 2 2
Pipe Area (ft ) =[Diameter (inch)] x ›/ 4 x 0.00694 ft /inch

Inside diameter and area for common pipe sizes are given in “Table A-6: ANSI schedule 40
pipe dimensions”.

Table A-6: ANSI schedule 40 pipe dimensions

ANSI PIPE ID (inch) ID (mm) AREA (inch2) AREA (mm2) AREA (ft2)
DIAMETER
1.5” 1.61 40.894 2.04 1312.77 0.0142
2” 2.067 52.502 3.36 2163.80 0.0233
2.5” 2.344 59.538 4.32 2782.61 0.030
3” 3.068 77.927 7.39 4767.03 0.0513
4” 4.026 102.260 12.73 8208.89 0.0884
5” 5.047 128.194 20.01 12900.42 0.139
6” 6.065 154.051 28.89 18629.39 0.201
8” 7.981 202.717 50.03 32259.06 0.347
10” 10.02 254.508 78.85 50847.84 0.5476
12” 12 304.800 113.1 72928.89 0.7854
14” 13.25 336.550 137.9 88913.73 0.9575
16” 15.25 387.350 182.7 117781.42 1.268
18” 16.88 428.752 223.7 144305.20 1.553
20” 18.81 477.774 278.0 179190.38 1.931
22” 21.00 533.400 346.4 223344.71 2.405
24” 22.60 574.040 401.2 258674.71 2.786

3. Determine pressure loss (PL) per 10 ft (3m) of pipe for each velocity and pipe size from
“Figure A-8: Restriction vs. velocity for pipe diameter up to 8” (high speed)”, and “Figure A-9:
Restriction vs. velocity for pipe diameter up to 24””.

4. Determine the equivalent pipe length (EPL) for all fittings of each pipe size:

“Table A-7: Equivalent Pipe Length Of Fittings In Feet (Meter)” give equivalent pipe length in
feet for various pipe fittings. For each pipe size sum the EPLs and add them to the total length
of straight pipe of that size to find the total of each pipe size. Exit loss does not need to be
considered in these calculations.

A - 12 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-7: Restriction vs. velocity for pipe diameter up to 8”

Figure A-8: Restriction vs. velocity for pipe diameter up to 8” (high speed)

A - 13 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Figure A-9: Restriction vs. velocity for pipe diameter up to 24”

Table A-7: Equivalent Pipe Length Of Fittings In Feet (Meter)


(Calculated using NTIS Handbook Of Hydraulic Assistance, Form AEC-TR-6630)

ROUND PIPE DIAMETER


FITTINGS 3” 4” 5” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16” 18” 20” 24”
d/D=1/4 3.5 4.9 6.3 7.9 11.2 14.5 18.3 20.6 24.3 29.7 31.9 39
Flanged (1) (1.5) (1.9) (2.4) (3.4) (4.4) (5.6) (6.3) (7.4) (9.1) (9.7) (11.9)
d 15Û D
d/D=1/2 2.4 3.3 4.3 5.4 7.6 9.9 12.5 14.0 16.5 20.3 21.7 27
Flanged (0.7) (1) (1.3) (1.6) (2.3) (3) (3.8) (4.3) (5) (6.2) (6.6) (8.2)
15° Diffuser*
EPL based on d/D=3/4 1.1 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.6 4.6 5.8 6.6 7.8 9.5 10.2 13
flow at “d” Flanged (0.3) (0.5) (0.6) (0.8) (1.1) (1.4) (1.8) (2) (2.4) (2.9) (3.1) (4)
d/D=1/4 13.2 18.7 24.3 30.1 42.7 56 70 79 93 114 122 151
Flanged (4) (5.7) (7.4) (9.2) (13) (17.1) (21.3) (24) (28) (35) (37) (46)
d D d/D=1/2 8.5 12.1 15.7 19.5 27.6 35.9 45.4 51 60 74 79 97
Flanged (2.6) (3.7) (4.8) (5.9) (8.5) (11) (14) (15.5) (18) (23) (24) (30)

Sudden expansion d/D=3/4 2.9 4.2 5.4 6.7 9.5 12.3 15.5 17.6 20.8 25.4 27.2 34
based on flow at “d” Flanged (0.9) (1.3) (1.6) (2.0) (2.9) (3.7) (4.7) (5.4) (6.3) (7.7) (8.3) (10.4)
d

90Û
34.7 43.7 49.1 58.1
Flanged ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
d
D = 1.4 d
(10.6) (13.3) (15) (17.7)
Y-Connection
based on flow at “d”

A - 14 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
5. Calculate the exhaust gas density correction:

Equation 3

Dc = Lc * 520 / (460 + Texh) or Dc= Lc * 273 / (273 + Texh °C)

WHERE:

Dc = density correction

Lc = lambda correction,

for Lambda = 0.97 to 1.06, Lc = 0.95 (rich burn)

for Lambda = 1.53 to 2.0, Lc = 0.97 (lean burn)

Texh = exhaust temperature ° F (° C)

6. Calculate the total piping restriction RP for each pipe size:

Equation 4
PL1(psi) P (mbar)
RP1= xDC xEPL(ft) or RP1= L1 xDC xEPL(m)
10 ft. m

7. Calculate the total exhaust system restriction:

Equation 5

RT = RP1 + RP2 + RP3 + RS + RA

WHERE:

RT= total restriction (psi or mbar)

RP1,2,3 = piping restriction for various pipe sizes (psi or mbar)

RS = silencer restriction (psi or mbar)

RA = accessories (catalyst, boiler, etc.) restriction (psi or mbar)

A - 15 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

APPENDIX B
SOIL BEARING LOAD
The necessary soil bearing load (S.B.L.) can be determined with the following formula:

(2.5)(M +F)
S.B.L.=
(W)(L)

2.5 = Safety constant

M = Weight of engine

W = Width of inertia block or pad

L = Length of inertia block or pad

F = Weight of engine and equipment (see Note 1)

The weight of the inertia block or pad (F) must first be determined.

The weight is determined by the following formula:

Weight of inertia block or pad = W x L x H x density of the concrete

NOTE1: The above example only takes into account the weight and size of the engine. An actu-
al installation would have to include the weight of the engine and the driven equipment, and
the weight of a common mounting skid large enough to support both the engine and driven
equipment.

Example: F3524GSI

F = 4.5 x 9.3 x 3.75 x 135 lb/ft3 F=1.37 m x 2.84 m x 1.13 m x 2162kg/mr3

F = 21187 lb. F = 9505 kg.

Now that “F” is known, the required soil bearing load can be determined using the given for-
mula.
(2.5)(M +F)
S.B.L.=
(W)(L)

(2.5)(15,000 + 21,187)
S.B.L.=
(4.5)(9.3)

Required S.B.L. = 2161.7lbs/sq.ft.

NOTE 1: The above example only takes into account the weight and size of the engine. An ac-
tual installation would have to include the weight of the engine and the driven equipment, and
the weight of a common mounting skid large enough to support both the engine and driven
equipment.

A - 16 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

APPENDIX C
VHP STAINLESS STEEL SPACERS AND SHIMS
Shims can be made locally (see “Table A-8: Shim dimensions”), preferably of stainless steel in a
size that adequately covers the engine base mounting pad. They should be sized in thickness
so that no more than four of one size are necessary to equal, or surpass, the next larger size.

Table A-8: Shim dimensions

Part Number A B C D E R
P310316 0.002 2.500 6.000 5.000 1.000 0.500
P310121 0.005 2.500 6.000 5.000 1.000 0.500
P310122 0.010 2.500 6.000 5.000 1.000 0.500
P310123 0.030 2.500 6.000 5.000 1.000 0.500

Stainless steel shims are shipped loose with Waukesha Generator Sets in thicknesses listed
in the table. Shims and spacers are available as listed in the table below. Waukesha recom-
mends ordering the quantities listed below for each engine.

Table A-9: Engine spacers

Item Description Recommended


order quantity
P316795 Front Spacer 2
P316794 Middle Spacer 2
P316793 Rear Spacer 2
P310316 Shim 0.002 in. thick 10
P310121 Shim 0.005 in. thick 20
P310122 Shim 0.010 in. thick 20
P310123 Shim 0.030 in. thick 10

A - 17 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

A - 18 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

APPENDIX D
CUSTOMER INTERFACE CONNECTIONS
Table A-10: Customer Interface Harness Loose Wire Identification

SIGNAL SIGNAL WIRE FROM WIRE SOCKET


CIRCUIT # WIRE LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAME TYPE COLOR PIN SIZE SIZE
1110 GOVAUXGND Used for compatible load sharing input. Aux. Input Ground Black 29 20 20-24
Used for power generation applications Ground
only.
1111 LOGIC GND Used as the negative connection point Customer Ground* Black 4 16 16-20
for 4 – 20 mA signals. Reference
Ground
1137 GOVAUXSHD Used as shield for compatible load Harness 44 20 20-24
sharing input. Shield Shield
Silver
1145 RS 485SHD Customer shield ground for RS485 twist- RS-485 Shield – Silver 13 20 20-24
ed shielded pair wire.
1305 RS 485A- RS485 MODBUS RS485 A- Comms Green 2 20 20-24
1306 RS485B+ RS485 MODBUS RS485 B+ Comms Yellow 23 20 20-24
1600 PROG OP1 A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Average RPM 4 – 20 mA Dark 9 20 20-24
represents an engine operating param- O/P+* Green
eter.
1601 PROG OP2 A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Oil Pressure 4 – 20 mA Dark 21 20 20-24
represents an engine operating param- O/P+* Green
eter.
1602 PROG OP3 A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Coolant Tem- 4 – 20 mA Dark 3 20 20-24
represents an engine operating param- perature O/P+* Orange
eter.
1603 PROG OP4 A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Intake Mani- 4 – 20 mA Dark Green 11 20
represents an engine operating param- fold Absolute O/P+*
eter. Pressure
1604 ENG ALM A digital output from the ECU that Engine Alarm Digital HSD White 14 20 20-24
indicates the ECU is in either alarm or O/P
shutdown mode.
1606 ESD A digital input to the ECU from the local performs an Emergency Digital Yellow 15 20
control that must be high for the engine emergency Engine I/P
to run. If ESD goes low, the engine shutdown. Shutdown
1607 ENG ESD A digital output from the ECU that Emergency Digital HSD White 42 20 20-24
indicates the ECU is in shutdown mode. Shutdown O/P
Output is NOT latched.
1608 GOVREMSEL Digital input to the ECU that switches be- Remote Digital I/P Yellow 22 20 20-24
tween either remote speed setting input Speed Select
or high/low idle input. Must be used to
enable remote speed input. Not typically
used for power generation.
1609 START Momentary digital input to the ECU that Start Engine Digital I/P Yellow 24 20 20-24
is used to begin the engine start cycle.
1611 RUN/STOP A digital input to the ECU from the local High = OK to Digital I/P Yellow 25 20 20-24
control that must be high for the engine Run
to run. If RUN/STOP goes low, the engine Low = Normal
performs a normal shutdown. Shutdown

A - 19 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
SIGNAL SIGNAL WIRE FROM WIRE SOCKET
CIRCUIT # WIRE LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAME TYPE COLOR PIN SIZE SIZE
1613 GOVREMSP– Input to the ECU that is used for remote Remote 4 – 20 mA Light 27 20 20-24
speed setting using 4 – 20 mA signal. Speed Setting I/P- open Blue
4 – 20 mA circuit for
Signal – 0.875 – 4.0
V operation
1614 GOVREMSP+ Input to the ECU that is used for remote Remote 4 – 20 mA Light 39 20 20-24
speed setting using 4 – 20 mA signal. Speed Setting I/P+ open Green
4 – 20 mA circuit for
Signal + 0.875 – 4.0
V operation
1615 GOVAUXSIG Used for compatible load sharing input. Aux. Input ±2.5 V I/P Red 28 20 20-24
Used for power generation applications Signal
only.
1616 GOVHL IDL Digital input to the ECU that changes Rated Speed/ Digital I/P Yellow 37 20 20-24
the operating rpm of the engine. Used Idle Speed
for power generation applications only. Select
When using GOVREMSEL, the input sta-
tus of GOVHL IDL must be checked. See
information on setting this input to a
“safe mode” in Table 5.00-5.
1617 KNK ALM A digital output from the ECU that indi- Engine Digital HSD White 47 20 20-24
cates the engine is knocking and will shut Knocking O/P
down immediately unless some action is
taken to bring the engine out of knock.
1618 GOV 40 Used for remote speed voltage input set- Remote 0.875 – 4.0 Tan 40 20 20-24
ting. Fit “jumper” between GOV 40 and Speed Setting V I/P+ Fit
GOV 41 to use 4 – 20 mA remote speed Mode Select “jumper”
input. between 40
and 41 for
4 – 20 mA
operation
1619 GOV 41 Used for remote speed voltage input set- Remote 0.875 – 4.0 Tan 41 20 20-24
ting. Fit “jumper” between GOV 40 and Speed Setting V I/PFit
GOV 41 to use 4 – 20 mA remote speed Mode Select “jumper”
input. between 40
and 41 for
4 – 20 mA
operation
1620 GOVALTSYN Alternate governor dynamics. Used for Alternate Digital I/P Yellow 10 20 20-24
power generation applications only to Governor
obtain a smooth idle for fast paralleling Dynamics
to the grid.
1621 AVL LOAD% A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Available 4 – 20 mA Dark 33 20 20-24
represents the available percentage of Load + O/P+ Green
rated torque the engine is capable of
producing.
1622 WKI– A 4 – 20 mA analog input to the ECU that Fuel Quality 4–20 mA Light 31 20 20-24
represents the real-time WKI rating of the (WKI) Signal - I/ P Blue
fuel. Use not necessary for most applica-
tions.
1623 WKI+ A 4 – 20 mA analog input to the ECU that Fuel Quality 4 – 20 mA Light 30 20 20-24
represents the real-time WKI rating of the (WKI) Signal + I/P+ Green
fuel. Use not necessary for most applica-
tions.

A - 20 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
SIGNAL SIGNAL WIRE FROM WIRE SOCKET
CIRCUIT # WIRE LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAME TYPE COLOR PIN SIZE SIZE
1624 ACT LOAD% A 4 – 20 mA output from the ECU that Engine Load + 4 – 20 mA Dark 32 20 20-24
represents the actual percentage of rat- O/P+* Green
ed torque the engine is currently produc-
ing.
1627 USER DIP1 A digital input to the ECU that can be User Defined Digital I/P Yellow 16 20 20-24
used to indicate a customer alarm. Digital Input 1
1628 USER DIP2 A digital input to the ECU that can be User Defined Digital I/P Yellow 17 20 20-24
used to indicate a customer alarm. Digital Input 2
1629 USER DIP3 A digital input to the ECU that can be User Defined Digital I/P Yellow 18 20 20-24
used to indicate a customer alarm. Digital Input 3
1630 USER DIP4 A digital input to the ECU that can be User Defined Digital I/P Yellow 19 20 20-24
used to indicate a customer alarm. Digital Input 4
1631 LRG LOAD Digital input to the ECU that “kicks” the Load Coming Digital I/P Yellow 20 20 20-24
governor to help the engine accept large
load additions. Mainly useful for stand-
alone power generation applications.

Use LOGIC GND “Customer Reference Ground” as the negative connection point for these 4 – 20 mA signals. Self-regulating solid
state logic can become high impedance during an overcurrent event. The overcurrent logic is rated for 1.1 A.

Table A-11: Required Connection Descriptions

DESCRIPTION WIRE LABEL PHYSICAL CONNECTION


Start Engine START Momentary (>1/2 second and <60 seconds) digital signal input to ECU to begin the starting process,
must momentarily be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) for the ECU to start the engine.
Normal Shutdown RUN/STOP A digital signal input to the ECU that must be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) for the
(Run / Stop) engine to run. If RUN/STOP goes open circuit, the engine performs a normal shutdown.
Emergency Shutdown ESD A digital signal input to the ECU that must be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) for the
engine to run. If ESD goes open circuit, the engine performs an emergency shutdown. NOTE: Do not use
this input for routine stopping of the engine. After an emergency shutdown and rpm is zero, ESD input
should be raised to high to reset the ESM. If ESD input remains low, ESM reset will be delayed and engine
may not start for up to 1 minute.
Rated Speed/Idle GOVHL IDL Digital signal input to ECU must be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) for rated speed, idle
Speed (Fixed Speed speed and remote speed setting enable (GOVREMSEL) must be open circuit. When using the Remote
Application) Speed/Load Setting, GOVHL IDL should be set to a safe mode. “Safe mode” means that if the wire that
enables remote rpm operation (GOVREMSEL) fails, the speed setpoint will default to the GOVHL IDL idle
value. Consider all process/driven equipment requirements when programming idle requirements.
Remote Speed/Load GOVREMSPGOV- Either 4 – 20 milliamp or 0.875 – 4.0 volt input to ECU. Inputs below 2 milliamps (0.45 volts) and above 22
Setting (Variable REMSP+ milliamps (4.3 volts) are invalid. Input type can be changed by fitting a jumper across pins 40 and 41 to
Speed Application) enable the 4 – 20 milliamp option. GOVREMSP- and GOVREMSP+ are used for the 4 – 20 milliamp input.
For voltage, input pin 40 is the + voltage input and pin 41 is the - voltage input. See Figure 5.00-5 for an
example showing the user 4 – 20 mA analog inputs.
Remote Speed Setting GOVREMSEL Digital signal input to ECU must be connected to +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) to enable remote
Enable (Variable speed/load setting. NOTE: When programming Rated Speed/Idle Speed, GOVHL IDL must be set to safe
Speed Application) mode.

A - 21 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Table A-12: Optional Connection Descriptions – Customer Interface Harness

DESCRIPTION WIRE LABEL PHYSICAL CONNECTION


Current Operating ACT LOAD% A 4 – 20 milliamp output from the ECU that represents the current engine torque output on a 0 – 125% of
Torque rated engine torque scale.
Desired Operating AVL LOAD% A 4 – 20 milliamp output from the ECU that represents the desired operating torque of the engine. Always
Torque indicates 100% of rated engine torque unless there is an engine fault such as uncontrollable knock.
Engine Alarm ENG ALM Digital signal output from ECU goes from open circuit to +24 VDC nominal (battery voltage – 1 volt) when
ECU detects engine problem. Output remains +24 VDC nominal while an alarm is active. As soon as alarm
condition is resolved, digital signal returns to open circuit.
Engine OK/Emergency ENG ESD Digital signal output from ECU goes from open circuit to +24 VDC nominal (battery voltage – 1 volt) when
Shutdown ECU performs an emergency shutdown.
Synchronizer Mode/ GOVALTSYN Digital signal input to the ECU when +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) allows synchronizer mode/alternate
Alternate Governor governor dynamics. User can program a small speed offset to aid in synchronization.
Dynamics
Aux. Speed Input GOVAUXSIG A ±2.5 volt input to the ECU used for compatibility to Woodward™ generator control products (or other
GOVAUXGND comparable control products).
GOVAUXSHD
Uncontrolled Knock KNK ALM Digital signal output from ECU goes from open circuit to +24 VDC nominal (battery voltage – 1 volt) when
ECU cannot control engine knock. Allows customer knock control strategy such as load reduction instead
of the ECU shutting down the engine.
Load Coming LRG LOAD Digital signal input to the ECU when +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) is applied, signals the ECU that a
large load will be applied to the engine. This input can be used to aid in engine load acceptance. User can
program delay time from receipt of digital signal to action by the ECU.
Four Analog Outputs PROG OP 1 4 – 20 milliamp analog outputs from the ECU that can be used to read engine parameters such as oil
through PROG pressure, coolant outlet temperature, engine speed and intake manifold pressure.
OP 4
MODBUS RS 485A– The ECU is a MODBUS RTU slave operating from 1200 to 19,200 baud on “two-wire” RS-485 hardware.
RS 485B+ Current operating values such as oil pressure and fault information are available.
RS485SHD
Four Digital Inputs USER DIP 1 Four digital signal inputs to the ECU when +24 VDC nominal (8.6 – 36 volts) is applied allows user to wire
through USER alarm and/or shutdown digital outputs of the local control into ESM. The purpose of these four digital
DIP 4 inputs to the ECU is to aid in troubleshooting problems with the driven equipment.
WKI Value WKI+ A 4 – 20 milliamp input to the ECU that allows the customer to change the input fuel quality (WKI) in real
WKI- time (4 mA = 20 WKI; 20 mA = 135 WKI).

A - 22 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
LOCAL CONTROL CONNECTIONS
Table A-13: Local Control Option Harness Loose Wire Identification

CIRCUIT # WIRE LABEL SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE WIRE COLOR WIRE SIZE SOCKET SIZE
1020 +24VFOR U User Power +24 VDC nominal (5 amps Red 18 16
maximum)
1120 GND FOR U User Ground Ground Black 18 16
1802 ESTOP SW Emergency Stop Switch, Depends on hardware Tan 18 16
Normally Open wired to switch
1804 ESTOP SW Emergency Stop Switch, Depends on hardware Tan 18 16
Normally Open wired to switch
1679 PREL CTRL Customer Prelube Control +24 VDC digital I/P Brown 18 16
1426 GOV SD+ Switch, Governor Shutdown input Purple 18 16
Actuator, G
1010 GOVSD+24 Shutdown Switch Power +24 VDC nominal Red 18 16
1642 PDB Alarm Spare Over-Current White 18 18

A - 23 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

APPENDIX E
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Gas Compression (GC) Spec Engines:

GC spec engines are engine configurations which already include the most common options
typically found in gas compression applications.

Table A-15 lists all the option codes that come standard on the GC spec engines. Table A-16
lists all the option codes that would be available to add to a GC spec engine. In all cases, the
Price Book should be referred to for the most current options and complete descriptions.

GC-Spec equipment for VHP 12- and 16-cylinder GSI:

Table A-15: Standard on 5794GSI/7042GSI/L7042GSI S4/7044GSI/9394GSI GC Spec

Code
Description
12-Cyl. 16-Cyl
1161C 1161C Flywheel - Machined to accept two drive adapters: 22.5” (572 mm) pilot bore,
20.5” (521 mm) bolt circle, (8) 1.00""-8 tapped holes; or 28.88” (734 mm) pilot
bore, 27.25” (692 mm) bolt circle, (12) 0.75”-10 tapped holes
3433E 3433E Alternator – Denso, 24V DC, 50A. Meets CSA Class 1, Div 2, Group A, B, C & D
hazardous location requirements
4293  Inlet Water Header; Side Inlet
4342  Water Outlet; Dresser Coupling
Optional 6012C BICERA Valve – Six (6) crankcase explosion relief valves.
6020 6020G Main Bearing Temp Sensors; 12-cylinder: 7 K-Type, 16-cylinder: 10 K-Type
6526A 6527A Exhaust Thermocouples; 12-cylinder: 14 K-Type, 16-cylinder: 18 K-Type. One
for each cylinder exhaust and pre-turbine.
6650B 6650B 50’ (15.2m) Exhaust Thermocouple harness; replaces 25’ (7.6m)
6650C 6650C 50’ (15.2m) Main Bearing Thermocouple Harness; replaces 25’ (7.6m)
6650D 6650D 50’ (15.2m) ESM Customer Interface & Option Harnesses; replaces 25’ (7.6m)
8006  Front Stub Shaft
9208 9208B High Pressure Air/Gas Starter (TDI T109)

Table A-16: Available Options on 5794GSI/7042GSI/L7042GSI S4/7044GSI/9394GSI GC Spec

Code Add or
Description
12-Cyl. 16-Cyl Omit

emPact Emission Control System — Catalyst w/access door on top of


1004 1004A Add:
housing for 0.50 g/bhp-hr NOx and 1.0 g/bhp-hr CO
emPact Emission Control System — Catalyst w/access door on side of
1004S  Add:
housing for 0.50 g/bhp-hr NOx & 1.0 g/bhp-hr CO
emPact Emission Control System — Catalyst w/access door on top of
1005 1005A Add:
housing for 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.3 g/bhp-hr CO
emPact Emission Control System — Catalyst w/access door on side of
1005S  Add:
housing for 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx & 0.3 g/bhp-hr CO
Omit Front End Drive Assembly: front shaft drive/pulley assembly, pillow
 1140 Add:
block and coupling
1140A  Add: Front Crankshaft Pulley - "C" grooves

Scope of supply is meant only as a guide. Always refer to the latest version of the Waukesha gas engine price book for available equipment.

A - 24 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices

Code Add or
Description
12-Cyl. 16-Cyl Omit

 Omit: Code 8006 - Front Stub Shaft


1140B  Add: Front Crank Pulley - "V" grooves
 Omit: Code 8006 - Front Stub Shaft
1141  Add: Pulley Spacer - 1" (Requires Code 1140A or 1140B)
Shipped-loose, off-engine mounting of air cleaner. Includes heavy duty
 2314C Add:
inertia precleaner
 2314D Add: Shipped-loose, off-engine mounting of air cleaner. Includes rain shield
 2314E Add: Standard air cleaners shipped-loose for on-engine mounting
 2316 Add: Shipped-loose weather louves for standard, on-engine air filters
2320B  Add: Precleaner - Heavy Duty Inertia Separator
2350  Add: Air Cleaner Housing Modification for Remote Air Intakes
3441 3441 Add: Delete Standard ESM Battery Box and Cable
4292  Add: Inlet Water Header; Center Inlet
Omit: Code 4293 - Inlet Water Header; Side Inlet
4341  Add: Water Outlet; 6" flange
Omit: Code 4342 - Water Outlet; Dresser Coupling
 5022B Add: Regulator – Lubricating oil level. Kenco model LCE
6012  Add: Four (4) Bicera Crankcase Relief Valves
6015 6015 Add: Crankcase Differential Pressure Switch
Magnetic Pickup -- Meets CSA Class 1, Div 2, Group A, B, C & D hazardous
6190F 6190G Add:
location requirements
6650CC  Add: Omit Main Bearing Temperature Sensor Harness
9208A 9208C Add: Low Pressure Air/Gas Starter (12cyl: TDI T115) (16cyl: TDI 121)
Omit: Code 9208(B) - High Pressure Air/Gas Starter
Dual High Pressure Pre-Engaged Air/Gas Starters (TDI T112); includes 2
9308 9208D Add:
starters
Omit: Code 9208(B) - High Pressure Air/Gas Starter
Dual Low Pressure Pre-Engaged Air/Gas Starters (TDI T121); includes 2
 9208E Add:
starters
Omit: Code 9208B - High Pressure Pre-Engaged Air/Gas Starter (TDI T112)
Add: Shipping Skid - For Overseas Container

Scope of supply is meant only as a guide. Always refer to the latest version of the Waukesha gas engine price book for available equipment.

A - 25 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Table A-17: Scope of Supply (12-Cylinder)

Customer Mounted/Shipped
12-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
STARTING SYSTEM
Air/gas starters (high pressure) 1 9208 Mounted
Air/gas starters (low pressure) 1 9208A Mounted
Dual air/gas starters (high pressure) 2 9308 Mounted
Inlet flexible connection 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection 1 ü
Solenoid valve 1 ü Mounted
Solenoid valve wiring to ESM (and to starter, if supplied) 1 ü Mounted
External piping to each starter 1 ü
Air/gas supply to each starter 1 ü
Electric starting motors, 24VDC 2 9000 Mounted
COOLING SYSTEM
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT 
Water pump 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat bypass 1 ü Mounted
Radiator / heat exchanger 1 ü
External piping ü
Inlet flexible connection 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection 1 ü
Expansion tank 1 ü
Circuit vent lines to expansion tank ü
Static pressure line to pump inlet 1 ü
Radiator fan drive ü
JACKET CIRCUIT 
Water pump 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat bypass 1 ü Mounted
Jacket water circuit heater, 2500W 240VAC 2 4282 Mounted
Jacket water circuit heater, 4500W 240VAC 2 4282A Mounted
Jacket water heater canister, for packager-supplied
2 4285 Mounted
heating element
Inlet water header - single 6" center inlet 1 4292 Mounted
Inlet water header - single 6" side inlet 1 4293 Mounted
Outlet water connection, single 6" flange 4341 Mounted
Outlet water connection, single 6" Dresser coupling 4342 Mounted
Radiator 1 ü
External piping ü
Inlet flexible connection 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection 1 ü
Expansion tank 1 ü
Circuit vent lines to expansion tank ü
Static pressure line to pump inlet 1 ü

Scope of supply is meant only as a guide. Always refer to the latest version of the Waukesha gas engine price book for available equipment.

A - 26 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
12-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
Radiator fan drive ü
Circuit vent lines to expansion tank ü
Static pressure line to pump inlet 1 ü
Radiator fan drive ü
FUEL SYSTEM
850 - 2300 BTU/scf ( 33.4 – 90.5 MJ/nm3) fuel system
1 ü Mounted
range
700 - 850 BTU/scf ( 27.5 – 33.4 MJ/nm3) fuel system range 1 2200 Mounted
Low Fuel Pressure System (LPFS), cont. duty, regulators 2 2021 Shipped Loose
Low Fuel Pressure System (LPFS), stand-by duty, regulators 2 2021A Shipped Loose
Carburetors 2 ü Mounted
Main gas regulators (shipped loose if LPFS option selected) 2 ü Mounted
Main fuel valve 1 ü
Fuel valve wiring and surge suppression diode 1 ü
Fuel valve open/close ESM control 1 ü
Fuel valve vent piping (if required) ü
Particulate fuel filter 1 ü
Coalescing fuel filter 1 ü
Additional fuel treatment (if required) ü
Fuel inlet flexible connection 1 ü
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil pump 1 ü Mounted
Oil filter (set of spin-on filters) 1 ü Mounted
Oil cooler and thermostats 1 ü Mounted
Centrifugal oil filter 1 ü Mounted
Oil pressure regulator 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump oil piping 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump air/gas motor 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump solenoid valve, wiring and control by ESM 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump air/gas supply 1 ü
Prelube pump air/gas piping - include w/ air/gas starter 1 ü Mounted
Oil level regulator 1 5022
Oil sump heater (if required) 1 ü
Base style oil pan (replaces deep sump, inc. ship-loose
1 5005
volume vessel)
Electric prelube pump w/ 115VAC 60Hz motor 1 5229B Mounted
Electric prelube pump w/ 208-230VAC 50/60Hz motor 1 5229D Mounted
Electric prelube pump w/ 24VDC motor 1 5229E Mounted
Prelube pump, for electric drive (motor by others) 1 5235 Mounted
BICERA crankcase explosion relief valves 4 6012 Mounted
Crankcase differential pressure switch 1 6015 Mounted

Scope of supply is meant only as a guide. Always refer to the latest version of the Waukesha gas engine price book for available equipment.

A - 27 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
12-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exhaust engine flexible connection 1 ü Shipped Loose
Exhaust silencer 1 ü
3-way catalyst sized for 0.5 g/bhp-hr NOx and 1.0 g/
bhp-hr CO, including pressure & temperature sensors and 1004 Shipped Loose
post-catalyst O2 sensor
3-way catalyst sized for 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.3 g/
bhp-hr CO, including pressure & temperature sensors and 1005 Shipped Loose
post-catalyst O2 sensor
Exhaust piping flexible connections ü
Exhaust system support ü
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM
Self-regulating, closed breather system 1 ü Mounted
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Air filters - 3" dry type w/ rain shield and service indicator 2 ü Mounted
Air cleaner housing for remote air intakes 2 2350 Mounted
Heavy duty inertia separators, for std. air cleaner 2 2320B Mounted
FLYWHEEL
Flywheel Housing, No. 00 SAE 1 ü Mounted
Flywheel, 30.25" 12-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 ü Mounted
Flywheel, 16.75" 12-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 1161A Mounted
Flywheel, 20.5" 8-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 1161C Mounted
Flywheel, for TD-321 clutch, 25.25" 12-hole bolt circle 1 1163 Mounted
Flywheel, machined for 24" SAE#24 generator coupling 1 1164 Mounted
Coupling 1 ü
Driven Equipment 1 ü
POWER TAKE-OFF
Rear Stub Shaft, for attachment to standard PTO flywheel 1 8000A Mounted
Front Stub Shaft 1 8006 Mounted
Front Crankshaft Pulley - Six C section grooves, 9.60in.
1 1140A Mounted
Pitch diameter
Front Crankshaft Pulley - Five C section grooves, 9.60in.
1 1140B Mounted
Pitch diameter
Front Pulley Spacer, 1 inch- requries 1140A or 1140B 1 1141 Mounted
ENGINE MOUNTING
Shims for engine alignment ü
Engine jacking bolts ü Mounted
Engine mounting bolts ü
Skid/baseplate, for engine and driven equipment ü

Scope of supply is meant only as a guide. Always refer to the latest version of the Waukesha gas engine price book for available equipment.

A - 28 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
12-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
ENGINE CONTROL & ELECTRICAL
ESM 1 ü Mounted
25’ (7.6m) Harnesses for ESM customer interface, local
2 ü Shipped Loose
control
50’ (15m) harnesses for items above 4 6650D Shipped Loose
200’ (60m) harnesses for items above 4 6650L Shipped Loose
HMI Display Panel (connects via customer interface har-
1 ü Shipped Loose
ness, for mounting in customer panel)
Cylinder exhaust thermocouples & wiring to bulkhead
14 6526A Mounted
connection
25’ (7.6m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples 1 6526A Shipped Loose
50’ (15m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples, replaces 25' 1 6650B Shipped Loose
200’ (60m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples, replaces
1 6650M Shipped Loose
25'
Cylinder exhaust thermocouple monitoring ü
Main bearing thermocouples & wiring to bulkhead con-
7 6020 Mounted
nection
25’ (7.6m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples 1 6526A Shipped Loose
50’ (15m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples,
1 6650C Shipped Loose
replaces 25'
200’ (60m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples,
1 6650N Shipped Loose
replaces 25'
Main bearing thermocouple monitoring ü
Magnetic Pickup - for customer use 6190F Mounted
Alternator - Denso, 24VDC, 50A 1 3433E Mounted
AC/DC Power Supply, Lambda model LZS-1000-3 1 3436 Shipped Loose
ESM battery box and cable 1 ü Shipped Loose
Delete ESM battery box and cable 1 3441
ESM control batteries ü
ESM control battery charger ü
PAINTING
Oilfield orange or gray topcoat 
SHIPPING SKID
For domestic truck or rail 1 ü Mounted
For overseas container 1 9998A Mounted
ENGINE LIFTING DEVICE
Lifting device (engine includes lifting eyes) ü

A - 29 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
12-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
SERVICE ITEMS
Engine Test Log 9900
Torsional analysis 9965/A/B
Mass Elastic System Data (MESD) 9981
Static and modal anaylsis of genset skid or engine/com-
ü
pressor skid
Specification Package 9972
Engine that is Customs Union compliant 9974Q
Engine that is CE Mark compliant 9974R
Engine that is CE Mark compliant - includes 9974R, plus
one Operator's manual in European Union language of 9974T
choice

Table A-18: Scope of Supply (16-Cylinder)

Customer Mounted/Shipped
16-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
STARTING SYSTEM
Air/gas starter (high pressure) 1 9208B Mounted
Air/gas starter (low pressure) 1 9208C Mounted
Dual air/gas starters (high pressure) 2 9308D Mounted
Dual air/gas starters (low pressure) 2 9308E Mounted
Inlet flexible connection(s) 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection(s) 1 ü
Solenoid valve 1 ü Mounted
Solenoid valve wiring to ESM (and to starter, if supplied) 1 ü Mounted
External piping to each starter 1 ü
Air/gas supply to each starter 1 ü
COOLING SYSTEM
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT 
Water pump 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat bypass 1 ü Mounted
Radiator / heat exchanger 1 ü
External piping ü
Inlet flexible connection 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection 1 ü
Expansion tank 1 ü
Circuit vent lines to expansion tank ü
Static pressure line to pump inlet 1 ü
Radiator fan drive ü
JACKET CIRCUIT 
Water pump 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat 1 ü Mounted
Thermostat bypass 1 ü Mounted
Jacket water circuit heater (if required) ü

A - 30 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
16-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
Inlet water header - single 8" inlet (center or side) 1 ü Mounted
Outlet water connection, single 8" flange ü Mounted
Radiator 1 ü
External piping ü
Inlet flexible connection 1 ü
Outlet flexible connection 1 ü
Expansion tank 1 ü
Circuit vent lines to expansion tank ü
Static pressure line to pump inlet 1 ü
Radiator fan drive ü
FUEL SYSTEM
850 - 2300 BTU/scf ( 33.4 – 90.5 MJ/nm3) fuel system
1 ü Mounted
range
Carburetors 2 ü Mounted
Main gas regulators 2 ü Mounted
Main fuel valve 1 ü
Fuel valve wiring 1 ü
Fuel valve open/close ESM control 1 ü
Fuel valve vent piping (if required) ü
Particulate fuel filter 1 ü
Coalescing fuel filter 1 ü
Additional fuel treatment (if required) ü
Fuel inlet flexible connection 1 ü
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil pump 1 ü Mounted
Oil filter (set of spin-on filters) 1 ü Mounted
Oil cooler and thermostats 1 ü Mounted
Centrifugal oil filter 1 ü Mounted
Oil pressure regulator 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump oil piping 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump air/gas motor 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump solenoid valve, wiring and control by ESM 1 ü Mounted
Prelube pump air/gas supply 1 ü
Prelube pump air/gas piping - include w/ air/gas starter 1 ü Mounted
Oil level regulator 1 5022B Mounted
Oil sump heater (if required) 1 ü
Electric prelube pump w/ motor, 110/220VAC 50Hz or
1 5229F Mounted
115/208-230VAC 60Hz
BICERA crankcase explosion relief valves 6 6012C Mounted
Crankcase differential pressure switch (monitoring by
1 6015 Mounted
customer)

A - 31 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
16-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exhaust engine flexible connection 1 ü Shipped Loose
Exhaust silencer 1 ü
3-way catalyst sized for 0.5 g/bhp-hr NOx and 1.0 g/
bhp-hr CO, including pressure & temperature sensors and 1004A Shipped Loose
post-catalyst O2 sensor
3-way catalyst sized for 0.15 g/bhp-hr NOx and 0.3 g/
bhp-hr CO, including pressure & temperature sensors and 1005A Shipped Loose
post-catalyst O2 sensor
Exhaust piping flexible connections ü
Exhaust system support ü
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM
Self-regulating, closed breather system 1 ü Mounted
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Air filters - dry type, with precleaner and service indicator 2 ü Mounted
Omit standard air cleaner 2314B
Remote air cleaner with inertia precleaners - off-engine
2 2314C Shipped Loose
mounting (no rain shield)
Remote air cleaner with rain shield - off-engine mounting
2 2314D Shipped Loose
(no inertia precleaner)
Weather Louver - for unsheltered, average dust environ-
2 2316 Shipped Loose
ments
FLYWHEEL
Flywheel Guard 1 ü Mounted
Flywheel, 30.25" 12-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 ü Mounted
Flywheel, 16.75" 12-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 1161A Mounted
Flywheel, 20.5" 8-hole and 27.25" 12-hole bolt circles 1 1161C Mounted
Flywheel, machined for 24" SAE#24 generator coupling 1 1164 Mounted
Coupling 1 ü
Driven Equipment 1 ü
POWER TAKE-OFF
Front Crankshaft Pulley - Six C section grooves, 9.50in.
Pitch diameter pulley, front end drive assembly, outboard 1 ü
bearing. Outboard bearing not mounted.
Omit front end drive assembly 1 1140
ENGINE MOUNTING
Shims for engine alignment ü
Engine jacking bolts ü Mounted
Engine mounting bolts ü
Skid/baseplate, for engine and driven equipment ü
ENGINE CONTROL & ELECTRICAL
ESM 1 ü Mounted
25’ (7.6m) Harnesses for ESM customer interface, local
2 ü Shipped Loose
control
50’ (15m) harnesses for items above 4 6650D Shipped Loose
100’ (30m) harnesses for items above 4 6650GG Shipped Loose

A - 32 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
Appendices
Customer Mounted/Shipped
16-Cylinder Qty. Standard Optional
supplied Loose
HMI Display Panel (connects via customer interface har-
1 ü Shipped Loose
ness, for mounting in customer panel)
Cylinder exhaust thermocouples & wiring to bulkhead
18 6527 Mounted
connection
25’ (7.6m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples 1 6527 Shipped Loose
50’ (15m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples, replaces 25' 1 6650B Shipped Loose
100’ (30m) Harness for exhaust thermocouples, replaces
1 6650EE Shipped Loose
25'
Cylinder exhaust thermocouple monitoring ü
Main bearing thermocouples & wiring to bulkhead con-
7 6020G Mounted
nection
25’ (7.6m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples 1 6020G Shipped Loose
50’ (15m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples,
1 6650C Shipped Loose
replaces 25'
100’ (30m) Harness for main bearing thermocouples,
1 6650FF Shipped Loose
replaces 25'
Main bearing thermocouple monitoring ü
Magnetic Pickup - for customer use 6190G Mounted
Alternator - Denso, 24VDC, 50A 1 3433E Mounted
AC/DC Power Supply, Lambda model LZS-1000-3 1 3436 Shipped Loose
ESM battery box and cable 1 ü Shipped Loose
Delete ESM battery box and cable 1 3441
ESM control batteries ü
ESM control battery charger ü
PAINTING
Oilfield orange or gray topcoat 
SHIPPING SKID
For domestic truck or rail 1 ü Mounted
For overseas container 1 9998A Mounted
ENGINE LIFTING DEVICE
Lifting device (engine includes lifting eyes) ü
SERVICE ITEMS
Engine Test Log 9900
Torsional analysis 9965/A/B
Mass Elastic System Data (MESD) 9981
Static and modal anaylsis of genset skid or engine/com-
ü
pressor skid
Specification Package 9972
Engine that is Customs Union compliant 9974Q
Engine that is CE Mark compliant 9974R
Engine that is CE Mark compliant - includes 9974R, plus
one Operator's manual in European Union language of 9974T
choice

A - 33 Form 10026-3
©2016 General Electric Company
GE Power
1101 West St. Paul Avenue
Waukesha, WI USA 53188-4999
Phone: +1 (262) 547-3311
Fax: +1 (262) 549-2795
www.ge-distributedpower.com

©2017 General Electric Company


All Rights Reserved

FORM 10026-4
5/2017

You might also like